Skip to main content

Full text of "The first six books of the elements of Euclid, in which coloured diagrams and symbols are used instead of letters for the greater ease of learners"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2011  with  funding  from 

Research  Library,  The  Getty  Research  Institute 


http://www.archive.org/details/firstsixbooksofeOObyrn 


C'€>r>-'^ 


~? 


'ih 


BYRNE'S   EUCLID 


THE    FIRST    SIX    BOOKS    OF 

liTHE   ELEMENTS   OF   EUCLID 

WITH  COLOURED  DIAGRAMS 
AND   SYMBOLS 


.V'  » 


THE    FIRST    SIX   BOOKS    OF 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  EUCLID 

IN   WHICH    COLOURED    DIAGRAMS    AND    SYMBOLS 

ARE   USED   INSTEAD   OF   LETTERS  FOR  THE 

GREATER   EASE    OF   LEARNERS 

BY    OLIVER    BYRNE 

SURVEYOR  OF  HER  MAJESTY'S  SETTLEMENTS  IN  THE  FALKLAND  ISLANDS 
AND  AUTHOR  OF  NUMEROUS  MATHEMATICAL  WORKS 


LONDON 

WILLIAM    PICKERING 

1847 


TO  THE 

RIGHT  HONOURABLE  THE  EARL  FITZWILLL\M, 

ETC.  ETC.  ETC. 

THIS    WORK    IS    DEDICATED 
BY  HIS  LORDSHIPS  OBEDIENT 

AND  MUCH  OBLIGED  SERVANT, 

OLIVER  BYRNE. 


INTRODUCTION. 


HE  arts  and  fciences  have  become  fo  extenfive, 
that   to   faciUtate   their   acquirement   is  of  as 
much  importance  as  to  extend  their  boundaries. 
Illuftration,  if  it  does  not  fhorten  the  time  of 
ftudy,  will  at  leaft  make  it  more  agreeable.     This  Work 
has  a  greater  aim  than  mere  illuftration ;  we  do  not  intro- 
duce colours  for  the  purpofe  of  entertainment,  or  to  amufe 
by  certain  combinations  of  tint  and  form,   but  to  airift  the 
mind  in  its  refearches  after  truth,  to  increafe  the  facilities 
of  inflrudlion,  and  to  diffufe  permanent  knowledge.     If  we 
wanted  authorities  to  prove  the  importance  and  ufefulnefs 
of  geometry,  we  might  quote  every  philofopher  fmce  the 
days  of  Plato.      Among  the  Greeks,  in  ancient,  as  in  the 
fchool  of  Peftalozzi  and  others  in  recent  times,  geometry 
was  adopted  as  the  befl:  gymnaftic  of  the  mind.     In  facfl, 
Euclid's  Elements  have  become,  by  common  confent,  the 
bafis  of  mathematical  fcience  all  over  the  civilized  globe. 
But  this  will  not  appear  extraordinary,  if  we  confider  that 
this  fublime  fcience  is  not  only  better  calculated  than  any 
other  to  call  forth  the  fpirit  of  inquiry,  to  elevate  the  mind, 
and  to  ftrengthen  the  reafoning  faculties,  but  alfo  it  forms 
the  beft  introdudlion  to  moft  of  the  ufeful  and  important 
vocations  of  human  life.    Arithmetic,  land-furveying,  men- 
furation,  engineering,  navigation,  mechanics,  hydroftatics, 
pneumatics,  optics,  phyfical  aftronomy,  &c.  are  all  depen- 
dent on  the  propolitions  of  geometry. 


viii  INTRODUCTION. 

Much  however  depends  on  the  firft  communication  of 
any  fcience  to  a  learner,  though  the  beft  and  moft  eafy 
methods  are  feldom  adopted.  Propofitions  are  placed  be- 
fore a  ftudent,  who  though  having  a  fufficient  underftand- 
ing,  is  told  juft  as  much  about  them  on  entering  at  the 
very  threfliold  of  the  fcience,  as  gives  him  a  prepolleffion 
moft  unfavourable  to  his  future  ftudy  of  this  delightful 
fubjedl ;  or  "  the  formalities  and  paraphernalia  of  rigour  are 
fo  oftentatioufly  put  forward,  as  almoft  to  hide  the  reality. 
Endlefs  and  perplexing  repetitions,  which  do  not  confer 
greater  exactitude  on  the  reafoning,  render  the  demonftra- 
tions  involved  and  obfcure,  and  conceal  from  the  view  of 
the  ftudent  the  confecution  of  evidence."  Thus  an  aver- 
fion  is  created  in  the  mind  of  the  pupil,  and  a  fubjeft  fo 
calculated  to  improve  the  reafoning  powers,  and  give  the 
habit  of  clofe  thinking,  is  degraded  by  a  dry  and  rigid 
courfe  of  inftrudlion  into  an  uninterefting  exercife  of  the 
memory.  To  raife  the  curiofity,  and  to  awaken  the  liftlefs 
and  dormant  powers  of  younger  minds  fliould  be  the  aim 
of  every  teacher ;  but  where  examples  of  excellence  are 
wanting,  the  attempts  to  attain  it  are  but  few,  while  emi- 
nence excites  attention  and  produces  imitation.  The  objedl 
of  this  Work  is  to  introduce  a  method  of  teaching  geome- 
try, which  has  been  much  approved  of  by  many  fcientific 
men  in  this  country,  as  well  as  in  France  and  America. 
The  plan  here  adopted  forcibly  appeals  to  the  eye,  the  moft 
fenlitive  and  the  moft  comprehenfive  of  our  external  organs, 
and  its  pre-eminence  to  imprint  it  fubjedl  on  the  mind  is 
fupported  by  the  incontrovertible  maxim  exprefled  in  the 
well  known  words  of  Horace  : — 

Segnius  irritant  animos  demijfa  per  auran 
^uam  qua  fimt  oculis  fuhjeSla  fidelibus. 
A  feebler  imprefs  through  the  ear  is  made, 
Than  what  is  by  the  faithful  eye  conveyed. 


INTRODUCTION.  ix 

All  language  confifts  of  reprefentative  figns,  and  thole 
figns  are  the  befl  which  efFedl  their  purpofes  with  the 
greateft  precifion  and  difpatch.  Such  for  all  common  pur- 
pofes are  the  audible  figns  called  words,  which  are  ftill 
confidered  as  audible,  whether  addreffed  immediately  to  the 
ear,  or  through  the  medium  of  letters  to  the  eye.  Geo- 
metrical diagrams  are  not  figns,  but  the  materials  of  geo- 
metrical fcience,  the  objedt  of  which  is  to  Ihow  the  relative 
quantities  of  their  parts  by  a  procefs  of  reafoning  called 
Demonftration.  This  reafoning  has  been  generally  carried 
on  by  words,  letters,  and  black  or  uncoloured  diagrams ; 
but  as  the  ufe  of  coloured  fymbols,  figns,  and  diagrams  in 
the  linear  arts  and  fciences,  renders  the  procefs  of  reafon- 
ing more  precife,  and  the  attainment  more  expeditious,  they 
have  been  in  this  inflance  accordingly  adopted. 

Such  is  the  expedition  of  this  enticing  mode  of  commu- 
nicating knowledge,  that  the  Elements  of  Euclid  can  be 
acquired  in  lefs  than  one  third  the  time  ufually  employed, 
and  the  retention  by  the  memory  is  much  more  permanent; 
thefe  facts  have  been  afcertained  by  numerous  experiments 
made  by  the  inventor,  and  feveral  others  who  have  adopted 
his  plans.  The  particulars  of  which  are  few  and  obvious  ; 
the  letters  annexed  to  points,  lines,  or  other  parts  of  a  dia- 
gram are  in  fadt  but  arbitrary  names,  and  reprefent  them  in 
the  demonftration  ;  inftead  of  thefe,  the  parts  being  differ- 
ently coloured,  are  made  g 
to  name  themfelves,  for 
their  forms  incorrefpond- 
ing  colours  represent  them 
in  the  demonftration. 

In  order  to  give  a  bet- 
ter idea  of  this  fyftem,  and   A 
of  the  advantages  gained  by  its  adoption,  let  us  take  a  right 


X  INTRODUCTION. 

angled  triangle,  and  exprefs  fome  of  its  properties  both  by 
colours  and  the  method  generally  employed. 

Some  of  the  properties  of  the  right  angled  triangle  ABC, 
expreffed  by  the  method  generally  employed. 

1 .  The  angle  BAC,  together  with  the  angles  BCA  and 
ABC  are  equal  to  two  right  angles,  or  twice  the  angle  ABC. 

2.  The  angle  CAB  added  to  the  angle  ACB  will  be  equal 
to  the  angle  ABC. 

3.  The  angle  ABC  is  greater  than  either  of  the  angles 
BAC  or  BCA. 

4.  The  angle  BCA  or  the  angle  CAB  is  lefs  than  the 
angle  ABC. 

5.  If  from   the  angle  ABC,   there  be  taken   the  angle 
BAC,  the  remainder  will  be  equal  to  the  angle  ACB. 

6.  The  fquare  of  AC  is  equal  to  the  fum  of  the  fquares 
of  AB  and  BC. 

The  fame  properties  expreffed  by  colouring  the  different  parts. 

That  is,  the  red  angle  added  to  the  yellow  angle  added  to 
the  blue  angle,  equal  twice  the  yellow  angle,  equal  two 
right  angles. 

-^  +  A  = 

Or  in  words,  the  red  angle  added  to  the  blue  angle,  equal 
the  yellow  angle. 


▲ 


<^H^     CZ    JK^    or 

The  yellow  angle  is  greater   than  either  the   red  or  blue 
angle. 


INTRODUCTION.  xl 


iL 


4.  jl^^    or 

Either  the  red  or  blue  angle  is  lefs  than  the  yellow  angle. 

^^^^^    minus   ^HL 
In  other  terms,  the  yellow  angle  made  lefs  by  the  blue  angle 
equal  the  red  angle. 


That  is,  the  fquare  of  the  yellow  line  is  equal  to  the  fum 
of  the  fquares  of  the  blue  and  red  lines. 

In  oral  demonftrations  we  gain  with  colours  this  impor- 
tant advantage,  the  eye  and  the  ear  can  be  addreffed  at  the 
fame  moment,  fo  that  for  teaching  geometry,  and  other 
linear  arts  and  fciences,  in  clafTes,  the  fyftem  is  the  beft  ever 
propofed,  this  is  apparent  from  the  examples  juft  given. 

Whence  it  is  evident  that  a  reference  from  the  text  to 
the  diagram  is  more  rapid  and  fure,  by  giving  the  forms 
and  colours  of  the  parts,  or  by  naming  the  parts  and  their 
colours,  than  naming  the  parts  and  letters  on  the  diagram. 
Befides  the  fuperior  limplicity,  this  fyftem  is  likewife  con- 
fpicuous  for  concentration,  and  wholly  excludes  the  injuri- 
ous though  prevalent  pradlice  of  allowing  the  ftudent  to 
commit  the  demonftration  to  memory ;  until  reafon,  and  fadl, 
and  proof  only  make  impreffions  on  the  underftanding. 

Again,  when  ledluring  on  the  principles  or  properties  of 
figures,  if  we  mention  the  colour  of  the  part  or  parts  re- 
ferred to,  as  in  faying,  the  red  angle,  the  blue  line,  or  lines, 
&c.  the  part  or  parts  thus  named  will  be  immediately  feen 
by  all  in  the  clafs  at  the  fame  inftant ;  not  fo  if  we  fay  the 
angle  ABC,  the  triangle  PFQ^the  figure  EGKt,  and  fo  on  ; 


xii  INTRODUCTION. 

for  the  letters  mufl  be  traced  one  by  one  before  the  fludents 
arrange  in  their  minds  the  particular  magnitude  referred  to, 
which  often  occafions  confufion  and  error,  as  well  as  lofs  of 
time.  Alfo  if  the  parts  which  are  given  as  equal,  have  the 
fame  colours  in  any  diagram,  the  mind  will  not  wander 
from  the  objedl  before  it ;  that  is,  fuch  an  arrangement  pre- 
fents  an  ocular  demonftration  of  the  parts  to  be  proved 
equal,  and  the  learner  retains  the  data  throughout  the  whole 
of  the  reafoning.  But  whatever  may  be  the  advantages  of 
the  prefent  plan,  if  it  be  not  fubftituted  for,  it  can  always 
be  made  a  powerful  auxiliary  to  the  other  methods,  for  the 
purpofe  of  introdudlion,  or  of  a  more  fpeedy  reminifcence, 
or  of  more  permanent  retention  by  the  memory. 

The  experience  of  all  who  have  formed  fyftems  to  im- 
prefs  fadts  on  the  underftanding,  agree  in  proving  that 
coloured  reprefentations,  as  pidlures,  cuts,  diagrams,  &c.  are 
more  eafily  hxed  in  the  mind  than  mere  fentences  un- 
marked by  any  peculiarity.  Curious  as  it  may  appear, 
poets  feem  to  be  aware  of  this  fadl  more  than  mathema- 
ticians ;  many  modern  poets  allude  to  this  viiible  fyftem  of 
communicating  knowledge,  one  of  them  has  thus  expreffed 
himfelf : 

Sounds  which  addrefs  the  ear  are  loft  and  die 
In  one  fhort  hour,  but  thefe  which  ftrilce  the  eye, 
Live  long  upon  the  mind,  the  faithful  fight 
Engraves  the  knowledge  with  a  beam  of  light. 

This  perhaps  may  be  reckoned  the  only  improvement 
which  plain  geometry  has  received  fince  the  days  of  Euclid, 
and  if  there  were  any  geometers  of  note  before  that  time, 
Euclid's  fuccefs  has  quite  eclipfed  their  memory,  and  even 
occalioned  all  good  things  of  that  kind  to  be  alfigned  to 
him  ;  like  ^Efop  among  the  writers  of  Fables.  It  may 
alfo  be  worthy  of  remark,  as  tangible  diagrams  afford  the 
only  medium  through  which  geometry  and  other  linear 


INTRODUCTION.  xiii 

arts  and  fciences  can  be  taught  to  the  blind,  this  vifible  fys- 
tem  is  no  lefs  adapted  to  the  exigencies  of  the  deaf  and 
dumb. 

Care  muft  be  taken  to  fliow  that  colour  has  nothing  to 
do  with  the  lines,  angles,  or  magnitudes,  except  merely  to 
name  them.  A  mathematical  line,  which  is  length  with- 
out breadth,  cannot  poffefs  colour,  yet  the  jundtion  of  two 
colours  on  the  fame  plane  gives  a  good  idea  of  what  is 
meant  by  a  mathematical  line ;  recolledt  we  are  fpeaking 
familiarly,  fuch  a  jundlion  is  to  be  underftood  and  not  the 
colour,  when  we  fay  the  black  line,  the  red  line  or  lines,  &c. 

Colours  and  coloured  diagrams  may  at  firfl:  appear  a 
clumiy  method  to  convey  proper  notions  of  the  properties 
and  parts  of  mathematical  figures  and  magnitudes,  how- 
ever they  will  be  found  to  afford  a  means  more  refined  and 
extenfive  than  any  that  has  been  hitherto  propofed. 

We  fliall  here  define  a  point,  a  line,  and  a  furface,  and 
demonflrate  a  propofition  in  order  to  fhow  the  truth  of  this 
affertion. 

A  point  is  that  which  has  pofition,  but  not  magnitude ; 
or  a  point  is  pofition  only,  abftradled  from  the  confideration 
of  length,  breadth,  and  thicknefs.  Perhaps  the  follow- 
ing defcription  is  better  calculated  to  explain  the  nature  of 
a  mathematical  point  to  thofe  who  have  not  acquired  the 
idea,  than  the  above  fpecious  definition. 

Let  three  colours  meet  and  cover  a 
portion  of  the  paper,  where  they  meet 
is  not  blue,  nor  is  it  yellow,  nor  is  it 
red,  as  it  occupies  no  portion  of  the 
plane,  for  if  it  did,  it  would  belong 
to  the  blue,  the  red,  or  the  yellow 
part;  yet  it  exifts,  and  has  pofition 
without  magnitude,  fo  that  with  a  Uttle  refledlion,  this  June- 


XIV 


INTRODUCTION. 


tion  of  three  colours  on  a  plane,  gives  a  good  idea  of  a 
mathematical  point. 

A  line  is  length  without  breadth.  With  the  afliftance 
of  colours,  nearly  in  the  fame  manner  as  before,  an  idea  of 
a  line  may  be  thus  given  : — 

Let  two  colours  meet  and  cover  a  portion  of  the  paper; 

where  they  meet  is  not  red,  nor  is  it 
blue  ;  therefore  the  jundlion  occu- 
pies no  portion  of  the  plane,  and 
therefore  it  cannot  have  breadth,  but 
only  length :  from  which  we  can 
readily  form  an  idea  of  what  is  meant  by  a  mathematical 
line.  For  the  purpofe  of  illuftration,  one  colour  differing 
from  the  colour  of  the  paper,  or  plane  upon  which  it  is 
drawn,  would  have  been  fufficient ;  hence  in  future,  if  we 
fay  the  red  line,  the  blue  line,  or  lines,  &c.  it  is  the  junc- 
tions with  the  plane  upon  which  they  are  drawn  are  to  be 
underftood. 

Surface  is  that  which  has  length  and  breadth  without 
thicknefs. 

When  we  confider  a  folid  body 
(PQ),  we  perceive  at  once  that  it 
has  three  dimenfions,  namely : — 
length,  breadth,  and  thicknefs ; 
fuppofe  one  part  of  this  folid  (PS) 
to  be  red,  and  the  other  part  (QR) 
yellow,  and  that  the  colours  be 
diflinft  without  commingling,  the 
blue  furface  (RS)  which  feparates 
thefe  parts,  or  which  is  the  fame 
S  thing,  that  which  divides  the  folid 
without  lofs  of  material,  mufl  be 
without  thicknefs,  and  only  poffeffcs  length  and  breadth ; 


INTRODUCTION. 


XV 


this  plainly  appears  from  reafoning,  limilar  to  that  juft  em- 
ployed in  defining,  or  rather  delcribing  a  point  and  a  line. 

The  propofition  which  we  have  felefted  to  elucidate  the 
manner  in  which  the  principles  are  applied,  is  the  fifth  of 
the  firft  Book. 

In  an  ifofceles  triangle  ABC,  the 
internal  angles  at  the  bafe  ABC, 
ACB  are  equal,  and  when  the  fides 
AB,  AC  are  produced,  the  exter- 
nal angles  at  the  bafe  BCE,  CBD 
are  allb  equal. 

Produce  _i__  and 
make      ■■■■  "^ 

Draw   ^— —  and 
(B.  i.pr.  3.) 


and 


and 


common 


and 


^    =    -^   (B.  I.  pr.  4.) 
Again  in         >^   and     N.    t   ^ 


xvi  INTRODUCTION. 


and    ^    =    ^; 

and    ^^^    ^     ^^^    (B.  i.  pr.  4). 


But 

C^E.  D. 

By  annexing  Letters  to  the  Diagratn. 

Let  the  equal  fides  AB  and  AC  be  produced  through  the 
extremities  BC,  of  the  third  Tide,  and  in  the  produced  part 
BD  of  either,  let  any  point  D  be  afllimed,  and  from  the 
other  let  AE  be  cut  off  equal  to  AD  (B.  i.  pr.  3).  Let 
the  points  E  and  D,  fo  taken  in  the  produced  fides,  be  con- 
nedted  by  ftraight  lines  DC  and  BE  with  the  alternate  ex- 
tremities of  the  third  fide  of  the  triangle. 

In  the  triangles  DAC  and  EAB  the  fides  DA  and  AC 
are  refpedlively  equal  to  EA  and  AB,  and  the  included 
angle  A  is  common  to  both  triangles.  Hence  (B  i .  pr.  4.) 
the  line  DC  is  equal  to  BE,  the  angle  ADC  to  the  angle 
AEB,  and  the  angle  ACD  to  the  angle  ABE  ;  if  from 
the  equal  lines  AD  and  AE  the  equal  fides  AB  and  AC 
be  taken,  the  remainders  BD  and  CE  will  be  equal.  Hence 
in  the  triangles  BDC  and  CEB,  the  fides  BD  and  DC  are 
refpedively  equal  to  CE  and  EB,  and  the  angles  D  and  E 
included  by  thofe  fides  are  alfo  equal.     Hence  (B.  i.  pr.  4.) 


INTRODUCriON.  xvii 

the  angles  DBC  and  ECB,  which  are  thofe  included  by 

the  third  fide  BC  and  the  productions  of  the  equal  fides 

AB  and  AC  are  equal.     Alfo  the  angles  DCB  and  EBC 

are  equal  if  thofe  equals  be  taken  from  the  angles  DCA 

and  EBA  before  proved  equal,  the  remainders,  which  are 

the  angles  ABC  and  ACB  oppofite  to  the  equal  fides,  will 

be  equal. 

Therefore  in  aii  ifofceles  triangle y  &c. 

Q^E.  D. 

Our  object  in  this  place  being  to  introduce  the  fyftem 
rather  than  to  teach  any  particular  fet  of  propofitions,  we 
have  therefore  feledled  the  foregoing  out  of  the  regular 
courfe.  For  fchools  and  other  public  places  of  infi:rud:ion, 
dyed  chalks  will  anfwer  to  defcribe  diagrams,  &c.  for  private 
ufe  coloured  pencils  will  be  found  very  convenient. 

We  are  happy  to  find  that  the  Elements  of  Mathematics 
now  forms  a  confiderable  part  of  every  found  female  edu- 
cation, therefore  we  call  the  attention  of  thofe  interefiied 
or  engaged  in  the  education  of  ladies  to  this  very  attractive 
mode  of  communicating  knowledge,  and  to  the  fucceeding 
work  for  its  future  developement. 

We  fhall  for  the  prefent  conclude  by  obferving,  as  the 
fenfes  of  fight  and  hearing  can  be  fo  forcibly  and  infiianta- 
neously  addreffed  alike  with  one  thoufand  as  with  one,  the 
million  might  be  taught  geometry  and  other  branches  of 
mathematics  with  great  eafe,  this  would  advance  the  pur- 
pofe  of  education  more  than  any  thing  that  might  be  named, 
for  it  would  teach  the  people  how  to  think,  and  not  what 
to  think  ;  it  is  in  this  particular  the  great  error  of  education 
originates. 


XVlll 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  EUCLID. 
BOOK  I. 

DEFINITIONS. 

I. 

A  point  is  that  which  has  no  parts. 

II. 

A  line  is  length  without  breadth. 

III. 

The  extremities  of  a  line  are  points. 

IV. 

A  ftraight  or  right  line  is  that  which  lies  evenly  between 

its  extremities. 

V. 

A  furface  is  that  which  has  length  and  breadth  only. 

VI. 

The  extremities  of  a  furface  are  lines. 

VII. 

A  plane  furface  is  that  which  lies  evenly  between  its  ex- 
tremities. 

VIII. 

A  plane  angle  is  the  inclination  of  two  lines  to  one  ano- 
ther, in  a  plane,  which  meet  together,  but  are  not  in  the 

fame  diredlion. 

IX. 

^  A  plane  redlilinear  angle  is  the  inclina- 

^r  tion  of  two  ftraight  lines  to  one  another, 

^^^  which  meet  together,  but  are  not  in  the 

ir  fame  flraight  line. 


BOOK  I.    DEFINITIONS. 


XIX 


When  one  ftraight  line  Handing  on  ano- 
ther ftraight  Hne  makes  the  adjacent  angles 
equal,  each  of  thefe  angles  is  called  a  rigkf 
angle,  and  each  of  thefe  lines  is  faid  to  be 
perpendicular  to  the  other. 


A 


XI. 

An  obtufe  angle  is  an  angle  greater 
than  a  right  angle. 

XII. 

An  acute  angle  is  an  angle  lefs  than  a 
right  angle. 

XIII. 
A  term  or  boundary  is  the  extremity  of  any  thing. 

XIV. 

A  figure  is  a  furface  enclofed  on  all  fides  by  a  line  or  lines. 

XV. 

A  circle  is  a  plane  figure,  bounded 
by  one  continued  line,  called  its  cir- 
cumference or  periphery ;  and  hav- 
ing a  certain  point  within  it,  from 
which  all  ftraight  lines  drawn  to  its 
circumference  are  equal. 

XVI. 

This  point  (from  which  the  equal  lines  are  drawn)  is 
called  the  centre  of  the  circle. 


XX  BOOK  I.    DEFINITIONS. 


XVII. 
A  diameter  of  a  circle  is  a  ftraight  line  drawn 
through  the  centre,  terminated  both  ways 
in  the  circumference. 

XVIII. 

A  femicircle  is  the  figure  contained  by  the 
diameter,  and  the  part  of  the  circle  cut  off 
by  the  diameter. 

XIX. 

A  fegment  of  a  circle  is  a  figure  contained 
by  a  ftraight  line,  and  the  part  of  the  cir- 
cumference which  it  cuts  off. 


^•••••••* 


••'•' 


XX. 

A  figure  contained  by  ftraight  lines  only,  is  called  a  redli- 
linear  figure. 

XXI. 
A  triangle  is  a  redlilinear  figure  included  by  three  fides. 

XXII. 

A  quadrilateral  figure  is  one  which  is  bounded 
by  four  fides.  The  fi:raight  lines  ■^— «— . 
and  .^_«— i«>  connecfting  the  vertices  of  the 
oppofite  angles  of  a  quadrilateral  figure,  are 
called  its  diagonals. 

XXIII. 

A  polygon  is  a  redilinear  figure  bounded  by  more  than 
four  fides. 


BOOK  I.    DEFINITIONS. 


XXI 


XXIV. 

A  triangle  whofe  three  fides  are  equal,   is 
faid  to  be  equilateral. 

XXV. 

A  triangle  which  has  only  two  fides  equal 
is  called  an  ilbfceles  triangle. 

XXVI.  " 

A  fcalene  triangle  is  one  which  has  no  two  fides  equal. 

XXVII. 

A  right  angled  triangle  is  that  which 
has  a  right  angle. 

XXVIII. 

An  obtufe  angled  triangle  is  that  which 
has  an  obtufe  angle. 

XXIX. 

An  acute  angled  triangle  is  that  which 
has  three  acute  angles. 

XXX. 

Of  four-fided  figures,  a  fquare  is  that  which 

has  all  its  fides  equal,  and  all  its  angles   right 

angles. 

XXXI. 

A  rhombus  is  that  which  has  all  its  fides 
equal,  but  its  angles  are  not  right  angles. 

XXXII. 


u 


An  oblong  is  that  which  has  all  its 
angles  right  angles,  but  has  not  all  its 
fides  equal. 


xxii  BOOK  L    POS'lVLATES. 


XXXIII. 

A  rhomboid  is  that  which  has  its  op- 
pofite  fides  equal  to  one  another, 
but  all  its  fides  are  not  equal,  nor  its 


angles  right  angles. 

XXXIV. 

All  other  quadrilateral  figures  are  called  trapeziums. 

XXXV, 

^^—--^,^g„^^^  Parallel  ftraight  lines  are  fuch  as  are  in 
^^^^^^^^^^    the  fame  plane,  and  which  being  pro- 
duced   continually  in    both    directions, 
would  never  meet. 

POSTULATES. 
I. 

Let  it  be  granted  that  a  flraight  line  may  be  drawn  from 
any  one  point  to  any  other  point. 

II. 

Let  it  be  granted  that  a  finite  ftraight  line  may  be  pro- 
duced to  any  length  in  a  ftraight  line. 

III. 
Let  it  be  granted  that  a  circle  may  be  defcribed  with  any 
centre  at  any  diflance  from  that  centre. 

AXIOMS. 
I. 

Magnitudes  which  are  equal  to  the  fame  are  equal  to 

each  other. 

II. 

If  equals  be  added  to  equals  the  fums  will  be  equal. 


BOOK  I.    AXIOMS.  xxiii 

III. 

If  equals  be  taken  away  from  equals  the  remainders  will 

be  equal. 

IV. 

If  equals    be    added  to  unequals  the  fums  will  be  un- 
equal. 

V. 

If  equals  be  taken  away  from  unequals  the  remainders 

will  be  unequal. 

VI. 

The  doubles  of  the  fame  or  equal  magnitudes  are  equal. 

VII. 

The  halves  of  the  fame  or  equal  magnitudes  are  equal. 

VIII. 

Magnitudes  which  coincide  with  one  another,  or  exactly 
fill  the  fame  fpace,  are  equal. 

IX. 

The  whole  is  greater  than  its  part, 

X. 

Two  ftraight  lines  cannot  include  a  fpace. 

XI. 

All  right  angles  are  equal. 

XII. 

If  two  ftraight  lines    (  }  meet  a   third 

ftraight  line  (  )  fo  as  to  make  the  two  interior 

angles  (  and    jj^ )  on  the  fame  fide  lefs  than 

two  right  angles,  thefe  two  ftraight  lines  will  meet  if 
they  be  produced  on  that  fide  on  which  the  angles 
are  lefs  than  two  right  angles. 


XXIV 


BOOK  I.    ELUCIDATIONS. 


The  twelfth  axiom  may  be  expreffed  in  any  of  the  fol- 
lowing ways  : 

1 .  Two  diverging  ftraight  lines  cannot  be  both  parallel 
to  the  fame  flraight  line. 

2.  If  a  ftraight  line  interfeft  one  of  the   two  parallel 
ftraight  lines  it  mufl  alfo  interfedt  the  other. 

3.  Only  one  ftraight  line  can  be  drawn  through  a  given 
point,  parallel  to  a  given  ftraight  line. 

Geometry  has  for  its  principal  objefts  the  expofition  and 

explanation  of  the  properties  oi figure,  and  figure  is  defined 

to  be  the  relation  which  fubfifts  between  the  boundaries  of 

fpace.      Space  or  magnitude  is  of  three  kinds,  linear,  fuper- 

ficial,  ■Si.w^foUd. 

Angles  might  properly  be  confidered  as  a  fourth  fpecies 
of  magnitude.  Angular  magnitude  evidently  confifts  of 
parts,  and  muft  therefore  be  admitted  to  be  a  fpecies  ol 
quantity  The  ftudent  muft  not  fuppofe  that  the  magni- 
tude of  an  angle  is  affefted  by  the  length 
of  the  ftraight  lines  which  include  it,  and 
of  whofe  mutual  divergence  it  is  the  mea- 
fure.  The  vertex  of  an  angle  is  the  point 
where  \}[\&  fides  or  the  legs  of  the  angle 
meet,  as  A. 
An  angle  is  often  defignated  by  a  fingle  letter  when  its 
legs  are  the  only  lines  which  meet  to- 
gether at  its  vertex.  Thus  the  red  and 
blue  lines  form  the  yellow  angle,  which 
in  other  fyftems  would  be  called  the 
angle  A.  But  when  more  than  two 
B  lines  meet  in  the  fame  point,  it  was  ne- 
ceflary  by  former  methods,  in  order  to 
avoid  confufion,  to  employ  three  letters 
to  defignate  an  angle  about  that  point. 


BOOK  I.    ELUCIDATIONS.  xxv 

the  letter  which  marked  the  vertex  of  the  angle  being 
always  placed  in  the  middle.  Thus  the  black  and  red  lines 
meeting  together  at  C,  form  the  blue  angle,  and  has  been 
ufually  denominated  the  angle  FCD  or  DCF  The  lines 
FC  and  CD  are  the  legs  of  the  angle;  the  point  C  is  its 
vertex.  In  like  manner  the  black  angle  would  be  defignated 
the  angle  DCB  or  BCD.  The  red  and  blue  angles  added 
together,  or  the  angle  HCF  added  to  FCD,  make  the  angle 
HCD  ;  and  fo  of  other  angles. 

When  the  legs  of  an  angle  are  produced  or  prolonged 
beyond  its  vertex,  the  angles  made  by  them  on  both  fides 
of  the  vertex  are  faid  to  be  vertically  oppofite  to  each  other  : 
Thus  the  red  and  yellow  angles  are  faid  to  be  vertically 
oppofite  angles. 

Superpojition  is  the  procefs  by  which  one  magnitude  may 
be  conceived  to  be  placed  upon  another,  fo  as  exadlly  to 
cover  it,  or  fo  that  every  part  of  each  fhall  exadly  coin- 
cide. 

A  line  is  faid  to  be  produced,  when  it  is  extended,  pro- 
longed, or  has  its  length  increafed,  and  the  increafe  of 
length  which  it  receives  is  called  its  produced  part,  or  its 
produSlion. 

The  entire  length  of  the  line  or  lines  which  enclofe  a 
figure,  is  called  its  perimeter.  The  firft  fix  books  of  Euclid 
treat  of  plain  figures  only.  A  line  drawn  from  the  centre 
of  a  circle  to  its  circumference,  is  called  a  radius.  The 
lines  which  include  a  figure  are  called  \isjides.  That  fide 
of  a  right  angled  triangle,  which  is  oppofite  to  the  right 
angle,  is  called  the  hypotenufe.  An  oblong  is  defined  in  the 
fecond  book,  and  called  a  reSlangle.  All  the  lines  which 
are  confidered  in  the  firfl:  fix  books  of  the  Elements  are 
fuppofed  to  be  in  the  fame  plane. 

The  Jiraight-edge  and  compajfcs  are  the  only  inflruments. 


xxvi  BOOK  I.    ELUCIDATIONS. 

the  ufe  of  which  is  permitted  in  Euclid,  or  plain  Geometry. 
To  declare  this  reflridlion  is  the  objedl  of  the  pojiulates. 

The  Axioms  of  geometry  are  certain  general  proportions, 
the  truth  of  which  is  taken  to  be  felf-evident  and  incapable 
of  being  eftabliflied  by  demonftration. 

Propojitions  are  thofe  refults  which  are  obtained  in  geo- 
metry by  a  procefs  of  reafoning.  There  are  two  fpecies  of 
propofitions  in  geometry,  problems  and  theorems. 

A  Problem  is  a  propofition  in  which  fomething  is  pro- 
pofed  to  be  done  ;  as  a  line  to  be  drawn  under  fome  given 
conditions,  a  circle  to  be  defcribed,  fome  figure  to  be  con- 
rtrudled,  &c. 

Th.t  folution  of  the  problem  confifts  in  fhowing  how  the 
thing  required  may  be  done  by  the  aid  of  the  rule  or  ftraight- 
edge  and  compafTes. 

The  demonftration  confifts  in  proving  that  the  procefs  in- 
dicated in  the  folution  really  attains  the  required  end. 

A  Theorem  is  a  propofition  in  which  the  truth  of  fome 
principle  is  afi^erted.  This  principle  mufl:  be  deduced  from 
the  axioms  and  definitions,  or  other  truths  previously  and 
independently  ellabliihed.  To  fhow  this  is  the  objedl  of 
demonftration. 

A  Problem  is  analogous  to  a  poftulate. 

A  Theorem  refembles  an  axiom. 

A  Pojlulate  is  a  problem,  the  folution  of  which  is  afiiimed. 

An  Axiom  is  a  theorem,  the  truth  of  which  is  granted 
without  demonftration. 

A  Corollary  is  an  inference  deduced  immediately  from  a 
propofition. 

A  Scholium  is  a  note  or  obfervation  on  a  propofition  not 
containing  an  inference  of  fufiicient  importance  to  entitle  it 
to  the  name  of  a  corollary. 

A  Lemma  is  a  propofition  merely  introduced  for  the  pur- 
pofe  of  eftabliftiing  fome  more  important  propofition. 


xxvu 

SYMBOLS  AND  ABBREVIATIONS. 

,*,  exprefles  the  word  therefore. 

*,' becaufe. 

zz equal.     This  fign   of  equaHty  may 

be  read  equal  to,  or  is  equal  to,  or  are  equal  to ;  but 
any  difcrepancy  in  regard  to  the  introdudlion  of  the 
auxiliary  verbs  Is,  are,  &c.  cannot  affedl  the  geometri- 
cal rigour. 

^  means  the  fame  as  if  the  words  '  not  equal'  were  written. 

r~  fignifies  greater  than. 

^   .    .   .   .  lefs  than. 

Cjl  .   .   .   .  not  greater  than. 

j]  .   .    .   .  not  lefs  than. 

-\-  is  vtzdplus  [fjiore),  the  fign  of  addition  ;  when  interpofed 
between  two  or  more  magnitudes,  fignifies  their  fum. 

—  is  read  minus  {lefs),  fignifies  fubtracftion ;  and  when 
placed  between  two  quantities  denotes  that  the  latter 
is  to  be  taken  from  the  former. 

X  this  fign  exprefi"es  the  produdl  of  two  or  more  numbers 
when  placed  between  them  in  arithmetic  and  algebra  ; 
but  in  geometry  it  is  generally  ufed  to  exprefs  a  rect- 
angle, when  placed  between  "  two  flraight  lines  which 
contain  one  of  its  right  angles."  A  reBangle  may  alfo 
be  reprefented  by  placing  a  point  between  two  of  its 
conterminous  fides. 

:  :;  :  exprefies  an  analogy  or  proportion ;  thus,  if  A,  B,  C 
and  D,  reprefent  four  magnitudes,  and  A  has  to 
B  the  fame  ratio  that  C  has  to  D,  the  propofition 
is  thus  briefly  written, 

A  :  B  ; :  C  :  D, 
A  :  B  =  C  :  D, 
A        C 

°'"b  =  d. 

This  equality  or  famenefs  of  ratio  is  read, 


xxviii     STMBOLS  AND  ABBREVIAnONS. 

as  A  is  to  B,  fo  is  C  to  D  ; 

or  A  is  to  B,  as  C  is  to  D. 
II   fignifies  parallel  to. 
J_  .   .   .   .  perpendicular  to. 

.    angle. 

.  right  angle. 


CIS 


two  right  angles, 

^1^  or  I N  briefly  defignates  a  point. 

C  =,  or  ^  fignifies  greater,  equal,  or  lefs  than. 

The  fquare  defcribed  on  a  line  is  concifely  written   thus. 

In  the  fame  manner  twice  the  fquare  of,   is  expreffed  by 
2 \ 

def.   fignifies  definition. 

pos pofiulate. 

ax axiom. 

hyp hypothefis.  It  may  be  necefiary  here  to  re- 
mark, that  the  hypothefis  is  the  condition  aflumed  or 
taken  for  granted.  Thus,  the  hypothefis  of  the  pro- 
pofition  given  in  the  Introduction,  is  that  the  triangle 
is  ifofceles,  or  that  its  legs  are  equal. 

conft confiruElion.     The  confiruBion  is  the  change 

made  in  the  original  figure,  by  drawing  lines,  making 
angles,  defcribing  circles,  &c.  in  order  to  adapt  it  to 
the  argument  of  the  demonfi:ration  or  the  folution  of 
the  problem.  The  conditions  under  which  thefe 
changes  are  made,  are  as  indisputable  as  thofe  con- 
tained in  the  hypothefis.  For  infi:ance,  if  we  make 
an  angle  equal  to  a  given  angle,  thefe  two  angles  are 
equal  by  conftrudlion. 

Q^E.  D ^lod  erat  detnonfirandum. 

Which  was  to  be  demonftrated. 


CORRIGENDA.  xxix 


Faults  to  be  correEied  before  reading  this  Volu7Jie. 

Page  13,  line  9, /or  def.  7  read  ^z.L  10. 
45,  laft  line, /or  pr.  19  r^^^  pr.  29. 

54,  line  4  from  the  bottom, /or  black  and  red  line  read  blue 
and  red  line. 

59,  line  4,  /or  add  black  line  fquared  read  add  blue  line 
fquared. 

60,  line  17,  /or  red  line  multiplied  by  red  and  yellow  line 

read  red  line  multiplied  by  red,  blue,  and  yellow  line. 
76,  line  11,  for  def.  7  read  dt?.  10. 
81,  line  lOyfor  take  black  line  r^i2ii  take  blue  line. 
105,  line  11,  for  yellow  black  angle  add  blue  angle  equal  red 

angle  read  yellow  black  angle  add  blue  angle  add  red 

angle. 

129,  laft  line, /or  circle  read  triangle. 

141,  line  I, /or  Draw  black  line  read  Draw  blue  line. 

196,  line  3,  before  the  yellow  magnitude  infert  M. 


(Euclib. 


BOOK  I. 
PROPOSITION  I.    PROBLEM. 


N      a     given    finite 

firaight  line  (  ) 

to  dejcribe  an  equila- 


teral triangle. 


Defcribe  I        "^^    and 


o 


(postulate  3.);  draw  and  —  (poft.  i.). 

then  will       \   be  equilateral. 


(def.  15.); 

—  (def.  15.), 

•                                      ^_        -mm 

—  (axiom,  i .) ; 

and  therefore       \^  is  the  equilateral  triangle  required. 

Q^E.  D 

B 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  II.    PROB. 


ROM  aghenp'jhit  (  ■■  ), 
to  draic  ajiraight  line  equ.al 
to    a   green  finite  firaight 

line  (  ). 


Draw  — — — —   (poil.  I.),  defcribe 

Afpr.  I.),  produce  — —    (poll. 

o 


2.),  defcribe 


(poft.  3.),  and 


(poll.  3.)  ;  produce  — ^— ""  (port.  2.),  ther 
is  the  line  required. 


For 


and 


(def.   15.), 


(conll.),  .*. 


(ax.  3.),  but  (def.  15.' 


drawn  from  the  given  point  ( 


is  equal  the  given  line 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  in.    PROP. 


ROM     the    greater 

(  "—)     of 

tivo  given  Jiraight 

lines,  to  cut  off  a  part  equal  to 

the  kfs  ( ). 


Draw 


(poll:.  3  .),   then 


(pr.     2.) ;     defcribe 


For 
and 


(def.  15.), 
(conll.) ; 
(ax.  I.). 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  IF.     THEOR. 


F  two  triangles 

have  two  fides 

of     the     one 

refpeSlively 

equal  to  two  fdes  of  the 

other,    (  I  to  ' 

and  ^__  to  w^^m. )  and 

the  angles  {  and    ^    ) 

contained   by    thofe   equal 
fdes  alfo  equal ;  then  their  bafes  or  their  fdes  (-^-^—  and 
^^^^)  are  alfo  equal :    and  the  remaining  and  their  remain- 
ing  angles    oppofte    to   equal  fides    are    refpeSlively    equal 

(  ^^  =:  ^^    and  ^^   n   ^^ ) ;   and  the  triangles  are 
equal  in  every  refpeB. 

Let  the  two  triangles  be  conceived,  to  be  fo  placed,  that 
the  vertex  of  the  one  of  the  equal  angles. 


or 


fliall  fall  upon  that  of  the  other,  and 


with 


then  will 


^^—  to  coincide 
coincide  with  » i  if  ap- 


plied: confequently 


will  coincide  with 


or  two  flraight  lines  will  enclofe  a  fpace,  which  is  impoffible 


(ax.  lo),  therefore 


and 


^=» 


^   ^^  ,  and  as  the  triangles 


*  =  > 


A-^ 


coincide,  when  applied,  they  are  equal  in  every  refpedl. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  V.     THEOR. 


N  anj   ifofceles  triangle 


A 


if  the  equal  Jides 
be  produced,  the  external 
angles  at  the  bafe  are  equal,  and  the 
internal  angles  at  the  bafe  are  alfo 
equal. 


Produce 


and 


y        (poft.    2.),         take 

—  -  =  9  (pr-  3-); 

draw  -i^— — »  and  n     . 


Then  in 


both,  and 


A     A 

/         \        and        /        \       we    have, 

= (conft.),    A 


common  to 


(hyp.)  /.  Jk  = 
and  ^   =   ^  (pr.  4.). 


^  =   ^  and 

1^^  -zz    ^^  \   and  ^^»    ^   ^^    (pr.    4.)    but 

^  =  ^  "*'  Jk  =  JL  ^'-^' 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  Ft.     THEOR. 


A 


and 


N  any  triangle  (  /       \  )  ;/' 
two  angles  (      '     and  ^L  ) 

are  equal,  the Jides  (  ■— ■ 

■~ )  oppofite  to  them  are  alfo 


equal. 

For  if  the  fides  be  not  equal,  let  one 
of  them  I  — ■  be  greater  than  the 


other 


and  from  it  cut  off 


(pr.  3.),  draw- 


Then 


(conft.) 


m 


A.naA, 


(hyp.) 


anc 


common, 


,*.  the  triangles  are  equal  (pr.  4.)  a  part  equal  to  the  whole, 

which   is   abfurd ;    ,*,  neither   of  the   fides  — "»  or 

'     is  greater  than  the  other,  /.  hence   they  are 


equal 


Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  FII.     THEOR. 


N  the  fame  bafe  (■ 


■),  a7id  on 


the  fa}7ie  Jide  of  it  there  cannot  be  tivo 
triangles  having  their  conterminous 
fides     (  and   — ^—  ^ 

•— — ■  and  «i^i— ii^—)  at  both  extremities  of 
the  bafe,  equal  to  each  other. 

When  two  triangles  ftand  on  the  fame  bale, 
and  on  the  fame  iide  of  it,  the  vertex  of  the  one 
Ihall  either  fall  outlide  of  the  other  triangle,  or 
within  it ;   or,  laftly,  on  one  of  its  lides. 


llructed  fo  that 


#='' 


If  it  be  poffible  let  the  two  triangles  be  con- 

'«■  rzzzz — zizzz  f  ^^^" 

draw  ——----  and, 

=  ^  (Pr-  5-) 

.'.    ^^    ^  ^^   and 

but  (pr.  5.)  yf  =  ^^ 

therefore  the  two  triangles  cannot  have  their  conterminous 


which  is  abfurd. 


fides  equal  at  both  extremities  of  the  bafe. 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  Fill.     THEOR. 


F  two   triangles 

have  two  Jides 

of  the  one  refpec- 

tjvely    equal   to 

two    Jides     of     the     other 

and  .—m^  =r  ), 

and  alfo  their  bafes  ( 

^  •— ),  equal ;   then  the 


and 


) 


angles  ( 

contained  by  their  equal  Jides 
are  alfo  equal. 


If  the  equal  bafes 


and 


be  conceived 


to  be  placed  one  upon  the  other,  fo  that  the  triangles  fhall 
lie  at  the  fame  fide  of  them,  and  that  the  equal  fides 
«______  and  .i.....i_ ,  —«-.—.  and  _____  be  con- 
terminous, the  vertex  of  the  one  mufi:  fall  on  the  vertex 
of  the  other ;  for  to  fuppofe  them  not  coincident  would 
contradidl  the  laft  propofition. 


Therefore  the  fides 
cident  with 


and  . 
,  and 


.,  being  coin- 


k-k 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  IX.    PROP. 


Take 


O  bifeB  a  given  reSlilinear 
angle  {^    J. 


(PJ*-  3-) 


draw 


,  upon  which 


defcribe    ^^    (pr.  i.). 


draw 


Becaufe  _  =  ..^...    (confl.) 
and  ^^^—  common  to  the  two  triangles 


and 


(conft.). 


4 


=  (pr.  8.) 


Q.  E.  D. 


10 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  X.    PROB. 


O  i>tye^  a  given  finite  Jlraight 

line     [f^^^mmmmwm'^. 


and 


common  to  the  two  triangles. 


Therefore  the  given  line  is  bifefted. 


Q;E.  D. 


BOOK  L     PROP.  XL     PROB. 


II 


( : 

a  perpendicular. 


ROM    a  given 

point  (  I      ), 

in      a  given 

Jlraight  line 

— ),     to  draw 


Take  any  point  (• 
cut  off 


)  in  the  given  line, 
(pr-  3-)' 


/       \    (Pr.  I.), 


conftrudl 

draw  — —  and  it  fliall  be  perpendicular  to 
the  given  line. 


For 


(conft.) 


(conft.) 


and 


-  common  to  the  two  triangles. 


Therefore  ^||   z:z. 
J. 


(pr.  8.) 
(def.  10.). 


C^E.D. 


12 


BOOK  I.    PROP,  XII.    PROB. 


O      draw     a 

Jlraight    line 

perpendicular 

to     a    given 

/  indefinite    Jlraight      line 

(^^^  ^  from  a  given 

[point  /ys.  )  "without. 


With  the  given  point  /|\   as  centre,  at  one  fide  of  the 

line,  and  any  diftance  — ^^—  capable  of  extending  to 

the  other  fide,  defcribe 


Make 
draw  ^ 


(pr.  10.) 


and 


then 


For  (pr.  8.)  lince 


(conft.) 


and 


common  to  both, 
= (def.  15.) 


and 


(def.  10.). 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XIII.     THEOR. 


13 


HEN  a  Jlralght  line 
(  ..m^^m^  )  Jlanding 
upon  another  Jlraight 
line  (  ) 

makes  angles  with  it;  they  are 
either  two  right  angles  or  together 
equal  to  two  right  angles. 


If 


be  _L  to 


gf..A=C£^ 


then, 

(def.  7.). 


But  if 
draw 


be  not  _L  to  — — — 
J. ;(pr.  II.) 


(conft.). 


Q.  E.  D. 


H 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XIV.    THEOR. 


F    two   Jiraight    lines 

fneeting  a  thirdjlraight 

line  (i  '    ),  at  the 

fame  pointy  and  at  oppofite  Jides  of 

it,  make  with  it    adjacent  angles 


and 


A 


)  egual  to 


two  right  angles  ;  thefe  fraight 
lines  lie  in  one  continuous  Jiraight 
line. 


For,  if  pofTible  let 


and  not 


be  the  continuation  of 


then 


+ 


but  by  the  hypothefis 


4  =  ^ 


+ 


(ax.  3.) ;  which  is  abfurd  (ax.  9.). 


,  is  not  the  continuation  of 


and 


the  like  may  be  demonftrated  of  any  other  flraight  line 
except  ,  ,*,  ^-^—  is  the  continuation 


of 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XV.     THEOR. 


15 


gles 
and 


F  two  right  lines  ( 
and  ■'    '    I  )  interfe£t  one 
another,  the  vertical  an- 


and 


^ 


are 


equal. 


►  - 

<* 


►  4 


In  the  fame  manner  it  may  be  fliown  that 


Q^E.  D. 


i6 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XVI.    THEOR. 

F  a  fide  of  a 


is  produced,  the  external 


trian- 


greater  than  either  of  the 
internal    remote    angles 


( 


▲  .A 


)• 


Make 


Draw 


— (pr.  lo.). 

-    and  produce  it  until 
■^^—  ;    draw    — ^— •  , 


In 


and    #•••' 


►  4 


and 


(conft.  pr.  15.),    /.    ^m     =   ^L      (pr.  4.), 

...f^.A. 

In  like  manner  it  can  be  fhown,  that  if  •—-■•• 
be  produced,    ^^^^    Q    ^^k  ,    and  therefore 

is   [=    ^ii. 
Q.  E.  D. 


which  is   ^z 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  XVII.     THEOR. 


17 


NY  tivo  angles  of  a  tri- 
angle f  *  are  to- 


gether lefs  than  two  right  angles. 


Produce 


+ 


then  will 


^Oi 


But,  mik  [=  Mk  (pr- 16.) 

and  in  the  fame  manner  it  may  be  Ihown  that  any  other 
two  angles  of  the  triangle  taken  together  are  lefs  than  two 
right  angles. 

Q;E.  D. 


i8 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XVIIL     THEOR. 


A 


N  any  triangle 

if  one  Jide  vbm*  be 

greater      than     another 

•^^mmmm-^  ^    the    aUgk   Of- 

pojite  to  the  greater  Jide  is  greater 
than  the  angle  oppoftte  to  the  lefs. 


1.  e. 


^ 


Make 


Then  will 


(pr.  3.),  draw 


A.A 


(pr-  5-)  J 


but 


i£k 


(pr.  16.) 


and  much  more 


IS 


^-> 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XIX.    THEOR. 


19 


A 


F  m  any  triangle 

one  angle  J/j^    be  greater 


than  another  ^^^    the  Jide 
which  is  oppojite  to  the  greater 


angle,  is  greater  than  the  Jide 
oppojite  the  lefs. 


If 


be  not  greater  than 


or 


then  muft 


If 


then 


which  is  contrary  to  the  hypothefis. 
—  is  not  lefs  than  •^■— ^—j  for  if  it  were, 

which  is  contrary  to  the  hypothefis : 


Q.  E.  D. 


20 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XX.    THEOR. 


NY  two  fides 
and     iBMMH 


of    a 


triangle 


Z\ 


taken  together  are  greater  than  the 
third  fide  (  ). 


Produce 


and 


make    >< 


(pr-  3-); 


draw 


Then  becaufe    ------  ^ 


(conft.). 


(ax.  9.) 


+ 


and  ,*, 


+ 


(pr.  19.) 


Q.E.D 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXL     THEOR. 


21 


F  from  any  point  (  /      ) 

within  a  triangle 

'  Jlraight  lines  be 
drawn  to  the  extremities  of  one  fide 
( ),  thefe  lines  mujl  he  toge- 
ther lefs  than  the  other  two  fdes,  but 
muJl  contain  a  greater  angle. 


Produce 


+ 


add 


to  each. 


(pr.  20.), 


+ 


+ 


(ax.  4.) 


In  the  fame  manner  it  may  be  fhown  that 
...  + [Z  +  


which  was  to  be  proved. 


4 
■.A 


(pr.  16.), 


(pr.  16.), 


Q^E.D. 


22 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXII.     THEOR. 


\IVE'N  three  ng/it 

lines  <  -■••— 

the  fum  of  any 
two  greater  than 
the  third,  to  conJlru6i  a  tri- 
angle whofe  Jides  Jhall  be  re- 
fpeSlively  equal  to  the  given 
lines. 


■■■•■«a««^«M 


AfTume 


Draw  — —  ^ 

and  -^— •  s: 


With 


defcribe 


and 


and 


0 


I  (pr.  2.). 
as  radii, 

(poft.  3.); 


draw  and 


then  will 


For 


and     ■ 


be  the  triangle  required. 
"'  i 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  XXIII.     PROB.  23 


iT  a  given  point  (  )  in  a 

given  Jiraight  line  (^^^»»— ■), 
to  make   an   angle   equal  to  a 

given  re 51  i lineal  angle  (.^^j^  )• 

Draw  — — — .  between  any  two  points 
in  the  legs  of  the  given  angle. 


Conftruct  v    (pr.  22.) 

fo  that  — ^^^  =  . 


and 


Then  jgj^    =   ^J^  (pr.  8.). 

Q.  E.  D. 


24 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXir.     THEOR. 


X> 


F    two    triangles 
have  two  fides  of 
the    one    refpec- 
tively     equal    to 
twofdes  of  the  other  ( 

to    and  ------ 

to  ),  and  if  one  of 

A 

the  angles  (  <3. .\ )  contain- 
ed   by    the    equal  fdes    be 


greater  than  the  other  (c.»«^),  the  fide  (  ^-^-^^  )  isohich  is 
oppofte  to  the  greater  angle  is  greater  than  thefde  (  -  .  .  .  ) 
which  is  oppofte  to  the  lefs  angle. 


Make 
and    — 


L^    -     ly    (pr.  23.), 
=    (pr-  3-). 


draw     ..-••-■-•»    and    -■——■. 
Becaufe    ^— — ^    3:     — •— —    (ax.  i.  hyp.  conft.) 


but 


and  .*. 


^    =    ^  (F- 


but 


(pr.  19.) 
(pr.4.) 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXV.    THEOR. 


25 


F  two  triangles 
have  two  fides 
("  '■"■'  and 
)  of  the 


one  refpeBively  equal  to  two 

fides   ( and    — — ) 

of  the  other,  but  their  bafes 
unequal,  the  angle  fubtended 
by  the  greater  bafe  (««—■—■) 
of  the  one,  muji  be  greater 
than  the  angle  fubtended  by 
the  lefs  bafe  ("■"■■"*•)  of  the  other. 


^Im-    ^ ,  C  or  H]  ^^     ^^^    is  not  equal  to   ^^ 
^^    •=.   ^^  then  ^^^^  :=  — — i-  (pr.  4.) 


for  if 


which  is  contrary  to  the  hypothefis ; 
^H^     is  not  lefs  than    ^^ 

for  if  A  :ti  A 

then  i  "H  '  (pr.  24.), 

which  is  alfo  contrary  to  the  hypothefis : 

/.A  [=  A. 


Q^E.  D. 


26  BOOK  I.     PROP.  XXVL    THEOR. 

Case  I. 


F  two  triangles 

have  two  angles 

of  the  one  re- 

fpedlively  equal 

to  two  angles  of  the  other. 


( 


and 


Case  II. 


tf) 


Let 


y),  and  a  fide 
of  the  one  equal  to  afde  of 
the  other  fmilarly  placed 
with  refpeSl  to  the  equal 
angles,  the  remaining  fdes 
and  angles  are  refpeSlively 
equal  to  one  another. 


CASE  I. 
and      I  which  lie  between 


the  equal  angles  be  equal, 
then    -^— —    ^    ^^— ■••• 


For  if  it  be  poflible,  let  one  of  them    -i 
greater  than  the  other ; 


be 


In   X       \  and    X    ^ 


we  have 


M  =  A 


(pr.4.) 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXVI.    THEOR.  27 

but    A   =  iH  (hyp.) 

and  therefore  g^^  =:   ^|B,  which  is  abfurd ; 

hence  neither  of  the  fides  — ^— ■—  and  — ■^■■■-  is 

greater  than  the  other;   and  .*.  they  are  equal; 


and  4  =  4, 


(pr.  4.). 


CASE  II. 
Again,  let  ^— — •  ^   ■— — —  ^  which  lie  oppofite 


the  equal  angles   flik  and   ^^^ .    If  it  be  poflible,  let 

Then  in  '        ^  and  J^^^  we  have 

= and   /^   =    J^, 


I'ut    H^    =    JBi^  (hyp.) 
.*.   jf^   =    ^^^  which  is  abfurd  (pr.  16.). 

Confequently,  neither  of  the  fides  ^"i— i"«»  or  ^-^"i—^  is 

greater  than  the  other,   hence  they  muft  be  equal.     It 

follows  (by  pr.  4.)  that  the  triangles  are  equal  in  all 

refpedls. 

Q^E.  D. 


28 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXVII.     THEOR. 


F  ajlralght  line 

(  )    meet- 

i?2g    tivo    other 

Jiraight      lines, 

-  and  )  makes 


with    them    the    alternate 


angles  ( 


and 


)   equal,   thefe  two  Jiraight  lines 


are  parallel. 


If 


be  not  parallel  to 


they  fliall  meet 


when  produced. 


If  it  be  poflible,  let  thofe  lines  be  not  parallel,  but  meet 
when  produced ;  then  the  external  angle     ^^  is  greater 

than  flHik>^  (pr.  i6),but  they  are  alfo  equal  (hyp.),  which 
is  abfurd  :  in  the  fame  manner  it  may  be  ihown  that  they 
cannot  meet  on  the  other  fide ;  ,*,  they  are  parallel. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXFIIL     THEOR. 


29 


(- 


F  ajlraight  line 

ting  two  other 
Jlraight     lines 


makes  the  external  equal  to 
the  internal  and  oppojite 
angle,  at  the  fame  Jide  of 
the  cutting   line   {namely. 


yl,  or  if  it  makes  the  two  internal  angles 

at  the  fame  ftde  (  ^l^  and  ^F  ,  or  f/^  and  ^^^) 
together  equal  to  two  right  angles,  thofe  two  Jlraight  lines 
are  parallel. 


Firft,  if 


1^   =^^ ,  then  Jjj^  =  ^r  (pr.  i 
mL  =    W    /.    II    (pr.  27.). 


Secondly,  if 


then 


+ 


(pr.  13.), 
(ax.  3.) 


(pr.  27.) 

C^E.  D. 


30 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXIX.    THEOR. 


STRAIGHT     /ine 

(  )  f^^^i'"g   on 

two  parallel  Jiraight 

»    lines     (  ■mmmim^mm    and 

•),    makes   the   alternate 


angles  equal  to  one  another ;  and 
alfo  tlie  external  equal  to  tlie  in- 
ternal and  oppojite  angle  on  the 
fame  Jide  ;  and  the  two  internal 
angles  on  the  fa?ne  Jide  together 
equal  to  two  right  angles. 


For  if  the  alternate  angles 


and 


▲ 


be  not  equal, 


draw 


»,  making 


A 


Therefore 


(pr-  23)- 
(pr.  27.)  and  there- 
fore two  ftraight  lines  which  interfed:  are  parallel  to  the 
fame  flraight  line,  which  is  impoflible  (ax.  1 2). 


Hence   the  alternate  angles    ^^   and   ^|^  are   not 
unequal,  that  is,  they  are  equal:  =:  ^^^  (pr.  15); 

.*.  jl^  =  l/^ ,  the  external  angle  equal  to  the  inter- 
nal and  oppofite  on  the  fame  iide :  if  ^^W    be  added  to 


both,  then 


A 


+ 


i 


^CLi 


(pr.  13)- 

That  is  to  fay,  the  two  internal  angles  at  the  fame  fide  of 
the  cutting  line  are  equal  to  two  right  angles. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXX.     THEOR. 


3^ 


TRAIGHT  /mes  ( _Z) 

lohich  are  parallel  to  the 

fame  Jlratght  line  (  ), 


are  parallel  to  one  another. 


Let 


interfedl 


Then, 


=    ^^   =   iJB    (pr.  29.), 


(pr.  27.) 


Q.  E.  D. 


32      BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXXI.    PROB. 


ROM  a  given 

point  /^  to 
draw  ajiraight 
line  parallel  to  a  given 
Jlraight  line  (——•). 


Draw 


from  the  point     /   to  any  point 


in 


make 
then  — 


(pr.  23.), 
-    (pr.  27.). 


Q.  E.  D. 


4 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXXII.    THEOR. 


33 


F  any  fide  (- 


•) 


of  a  triangle  be  pro- 
duced,   the    external 

^figl^  ( ^^^)  '-^  ^qual 
to  the  fum  of  the  two  internal  and 


oppofte  angles  (  aiid  ^^^ ) , 

and  the  three  internal  angles  of 
every  triangle  taken  together  are 
equal  to  two  right  angles. 


Through  the  point  /        draw 
II   (pr.  3i-)- 


Then 


(pr.  29.), 


and  therefore 


(pr.  13.). 


J 


-dy 


Q.  E.  D. 


34 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  XXXIII.     THEOR. 


TRAIGHT  fines  (- 


and  )    which  join 

the  adjacent  extremities  of 
two  equal  and  parallel Jiraight 
~— —    and    "•»..---=. ),    are 


themf elves  equal  and  parallel. 


Draw 


the  diagonal. 
(hyp.) 


and 


(pr.  29.) 


common  to  the  two  triangles ; 


■,  and 


▼  =  4 


(pr.  4.) ; 


and  /. 


(pr.  27.). 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  XXXIV.    THEOR. 


35 


HE  ofpofite  Jides  and  angles  of 
any  parallelogram  are  equal, 
and  the  diagonal  (i^— ^^— ) 


divides  it  into  two  equal  parts. 


Since 


=  A 
^  =  t 


(pr.  29.) 


and 


common  to  the  two  triangles. 


/.    \ 


\  (pr-  26.) 


and    ^^W     =    ^^M    (^^'^ ' 
Therefore  the  oppofite  fides  and  angles  of  the  parallelo- 
gram are  equal :  and  as  the  triangles 


.N.""^ 


are  equal  in  every  refpect  (pr.   4,),  the  diagonal  divides 

the  parallelogram  into  two  equal  parts. 

Q.  E.  D. 


36  BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXXV.    THEOR. 


ARALLELOGRAMS 

on  the  fame  bafe,  and 
between  the  fame  paral- 
lels, are  {in  area)  equal. 


and 


But, 


On  account  of  the  parallels, 

_Kpr.  29.) 
(Pi--  34-) 

(pr.  8.) 


r=? 


minus 


minus 


r= 


Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXXVI.    THEOR. 


37 


ARALLELO- 
GRAMS 


1 


is* 


(     ^^     and  )    on 

equal  bafes,  and  between  the 
fame  parallels,  are  equal. 


Draw 


and   ---..-—  , 

■,  by  (pr.  34,  and  hyp.); 

=  and  II  "— (pr.  33.) 


And  therefore 


but 


J 
1.1 


is  a  parallelogram  : 


(pr-  35-) 


(ax.  I.). 


Q.  E.  D. 


38  BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXXFII.     THEOR. 


RIANGLES 


on  the  fame  bafe  (• 


■) 


and  between  the  fame  paral- 
lels are  equal. 


Draw 


Produce 


\  fpr.  ^i 


(pr-  3I-) 


1—M.  and   ^^ 


are  parallelograms 
on  the  fame  bafe,  and  between  the  fame  parallels, 
and  therefore  equal,  (pr.  35.) 


T 


=:  twice 


f 


^  twice 


4 


(■  (pr-  34-) 


k.i 


Q.  E  D. 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  XXXVIII.    THEOR.        39 


RIANGLES 


;4H  ^'ij  JH 


(^Hi    tind  jm^  )     on 
equal  bajes  and  between  •■• 
the  fame  parallels  are  equal. 


Draw 
and 


II 


(pr.  31.). 


I  # 


(pr.  36.); 


and 


■      i 
=    twice   ^^k 

^^    =   twice   ^H 


(pr-  34-)' 


i  k 


(ax.  7.). 


Q^E.  D. 


40 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XXXIX.    THEOR, 


QUAL     triangles 


\ 


and         "^  on  the  fame  bafe 
(  )  and  on  the  fame  fide  of  it,  are 

between  the  fvne  parallels. 


If-^— ■»,  which  joins  the  vertices 
of  the  triangles,  be  not  ||  , 

draw II  (pr.3i-). 


meeting 


Draw 


Becaufe 


(conft.) 


but 


W.4 


(pr-  37-)  ■• 

(hyp.) ; 


A=4 


,  a  part  equal  to  the  whole, 
which  is  abfurd. 
Ji.  ^i^-^-^ ;    and  in  the  fame 
manner  it  can  be  demonflrated,  that  no  other  line  except 

is  II  ;    .-.  II  . 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XL.     THEOR. 


41 


QUAL     trian- 


gles 


( 


and    M. 


) 


on  equal  bafes,  and  on  the 
fame  Jide,  are  between  the 
fame  parallels. 


If               ■    which  joins  the  vertices  of  triangles 
be  not  II  -  , 

draw  — — — .  II  — -~— 


(pr.  31.), 


meeting 


Draw 


Becaufe 


(conft.) 


.  ^^^-    ^   1^^^  ,  a  part  equal  to  the  whole, 
which  is  abfurd. 

'                 41"  ~^^^"^  •  ^"f^  in  the  fame  manner  it 
can  be  demonftrated,  that  no  other  line  except 
—  is  II  :    .-. 


Q^E.  D. 


42 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XLI.    THEOR. 


Draw 


Then 


F    a  paral- 
lelogram 


A 


and  a  triangle  ^^^  are  upon 
the  fame  bafe  — ^^^  and  be  tine  en 
the  fame  parallels  -.—----  and 
■  ,  the  parallelogram  is  double 

the  triangle. 


the  diagonal ; 


V=J 


zz  twice 


(pr-  37-) 


(pr-  34-) 


^^       4 

^1^.       ^  twice  ^H^  . 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XLII.    THEOR.  43 


O     conJiruSl     a 
parallelogram 
equal  to  a  given 


4 


triangle        ^^/^andhaV" 
ing  an  angle  equal  to  a  given 

rectilinear  angle  , 


Make  — — ^  =  ■— «  (pr.  10.) 
Draw  , 

Draw  I"  [j         ~'|  (pr.  31.) 

^1^    :=  twice  y 


(pr.  41.) 


but         ^     z=  lA  (pr.  38.) 


4 


Q.  E.  D. 


44  BOOK  I.    PROP.  XLIII.     THEOR. 


HE   complements 


and    ^^^      cf 

the  parallelograms  ivhicli  are  about 
the  diagonal  of  a  parallelogram  are 
equal. 


(pr-  34-) 


4.        ^^ 

and       JBL    =  ^ 


(pi--  34-) 


(ax.  3.) 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.     PROP.  XLIV.    PROB. 


45 


O       a       given 
Jlraight       line 

ply  a  parallelo- 
gram equal  to  a  given  tri- 
angle (  ^^^^'      ),  and 


having  an  angle   equal  to 
a  given   reSiilinear   angle 

(         )■ 


g 


wi 


th 


▲ 


=  ._i 


Make 

(pr.  42.) 

and  having  one  of  its  fides  -— — -  conterminous 

with  and  in  continuation  of  1  m  . 

Produce  w^^mmm^   till  it  meets       '  '■"■'       ||  »»»■«»■ 

draw  prnHnrp  it  fill  if  mpptg  •■»■-,•  continued ; 


draw  •••««-.•   II  — «■■  meeting 

produced,  and  produce  >•»■•»« 


but 


(pr.  430 


(conft.) 


▲  =  ▼=▲ 


(pr.  19.  and  confl.) 
Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XLF.    PROP. 


O  conjlrudl  a  parallelogram  equal 
to    a    given    reSlilinear   figure 


( 


► 


)   and  having   an 


angle    equal  to   a  given    reSlilinear    angle 


Draw 


and 


K.(t^m 


dividing 


to 


the  redtilinear  figure  into  triangles. 

Conftrudl 
having    .„ 
—  apply 


(pr.42.) 


having 


to 


having 


(pr.  44.) 

apply  M  = 

(pr.  44.) 


#=► 


##=  >, 


and 


Mf      mg   is  a  parallelogram,  (prs.  29,  14,  30.) 
having 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XLVI.    PROB. 


47 


PON    a   given  Jlraight    line 
(— ^^^)     to     conJlruB    a 
fquare. 


Draw 

Draw  • 
ing    . 


and 


(pr.  1 1,  and  3.) 


II  

drawn   || 


>,  and  meet- 


In 


^ 


(conft.) 


=:  a  right  angle  (conft.) 

^H  =     Hp  =  ^  "g'^^  ^"gle  (pr.  29.), 
and  the  remaining  fides  and  angles  muft 
be  equal,  (pr.  34.) 


and  ,*, 


is  a  fquare.  (def.  27.) 

Q.  E.  D. 


48  BOOK  I.     PROP.  XLVII.    THEOR. 


N     a      right      angled     triangle 

the  fquare  on  the 
liypotenufe       <•   •<        is  equal  to 


the  fum  of  the  fquares  ofthejides,  (■ 
and  ). 


On 


and 


defcribe  fquares,  (pr.  46.) 


Draw  -.—I 
alfo  draw 


-    (pr.  31-) 


and 


To  each  add 


T 


and 


Again,  becaufe 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XLVII.    THEOR. 


49 


and 


twice 


=   twice        ^H  • 


In  the  fame  manner  it  may  be  fhown 
that     ^^    ^ 


hence 


## 


Q  E.  D. 


H 


so 


BOOK  I.    PROP.  XLVIIL     THEOR. 


/ 


F     t/ie   fquare 
of     one     Jide 

{ \ )  f 

a    triangle    is 

equal  to  the  fquares  of  the 

other  tivo  fides  (nn.i        i 

and  ),  the  angle 


( 


)fubtended  by  that 


fide  is  a  right  angle. 


Draw  ■- 


and  ^ 


(prs.11.3.) 


and  draw  —»-«--—  alfo. 


Since 


(conft.) 


... "-  + 

but ^  +  - 

and  — ^— i^-  -|- 


+ 


(pr.  47-). 
-  (hyp.) 


and  ,*, 


confequently 


(pr.  8.), 


is  a  right  angle. 


Q.  E.  D. 


51 


BOOK  II. 


DEFINITION  I. 


RECTANGLE   or   a 

right  angled  parallelo- 
gram is  faid  to  be  con- 
tained by  any  two  of  its  adjacent 
or  conterminous  fides. 


Thus :  the  right  angled  parallelogram  HH[ 
be  contained  by  the  fides  — — — ^  and  — 
or  it  may  be  briefly  defignated  by 


is  faid  to 


If  the  adjacent  fides  are  eq^ual ;  i.  e.  -— — —  ^  ^ 

then  — i^»^-«   .  -  which  is  the  expreflion 


for  the  redtangle  under 


is  a  fquare,  and 


is  equal  to  J 


and 

-  or 

-  or 


52 


BOOK  II.     DEFINITIONS. 


DEFINITION  II. 


N  a  parallelogram, 
the  figure  compokd 
of  one  ot  the  paral- 
lelograms about  the  diagonal, 
together  with  the  two  comple- 
ments, is  called  a  Gnomon. 


Thus 


and 


are 


called  Gnomons. 


BOOK  II.    PROP.  I.    PROP. 


53 


HE  7-e£langle  contained 
by  two  ftraight  lines, 
one  of  which  is  divided 
into  any  number  of  parts. 


=  <;+ — 

/;  equal  to  the  fum  of  the  reBangks 

contained  by  the  undivided  line,  and  the  fever al  parts  of  the 

divided  line. 


I      — — J— —  i; 


Draw 


_L  —— —      and  r= 


(prs.2.3.B.i.); 


complete  the  parallelograms,   that  is  to  fay, 


Draw 


\  (pr.  31-  B.I.) 


L 


I 


+ 


-  + 

Q.  E.  D. 


54 


BOOK  II.    PROP.  II.    THEOR. 


I 

I 


F  a  Jlraight  line  be  divided 
into  any  tivo  parts  '     i  , 

the  fquare  of  the  -whole  line 
is    equal  to   the  fum  of  the 

reSlangles  contained  by  the  whole  line  and 

each  of  its  parts. 


-f 


I 


Defcribe   ■■-^^    (B.  i.  pr.  46.) 
Draw  —  parallel  to  -----   (B.  i.  pr.  31  ) 


I 


+ 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  11.    PROP.  III.    THEOR. 


55 


F  a  Jiraig/it  line  be  di- 
vided into  any  two  parts 
■  11  '  ,  the  reBangle 
contained  by  the  "whole 
line  and  either  of  its  parts,  is  equal  to 
the  fquare  of  that  part,  together  with 
the  reSf  angle  under  the  parts. 


m 

i 

=  — ^  + 


or. 


Defcribe 


Complete 


I 


(pr.  46,  B.  I.) 


(pr.  31,  B.  I.) 


Then 


+ 


,  but 


and 


In  a  fimilar  manner  it  may  be  readily  fhown 
that    — .  —  zr  m^'i  _^  ——.  — . 

Q.  E.  D 


56 


BOOK  II.    PROP.  IF.     THEOR. 


F  a  Jiraight  line  be  divided 
into  any  tico  parts  , 

the  fquare  of  the  ii'hole  line 
is  equal  to  the  fquare s  of  the 

parts,  together  ii-ith  twice  the  reef  angle 

contained  by  the  parts. 


+ 


+ 


twice 


Defcribe 
draw  - 


and 


4- 


vpr.  46,  B.  1.) 
■     port.  I.). 


(pr.  31,  B.  I.) 


4.4 


(pr.  5,  B.  I.), 


(pr.  29,  B.  I.) 


4 


500a:  //.     PROP.  IF.     THEOR.  57 


B 


/.  by  (prs.6,29,  34.  B.  I.)    t,^J  is  a  fquarc  ^    — i 
For  the  fame  reafons   r    I  is  a  Iquare  :=  ~"", 

«  ""~  (pr,  43,  b.  I.) 


I 


b"t  E— i     =  C-J+  — +— + 


B. 


twice    >'         •  ■— , 

Q.  E.  D. 


58 


BOOK  11.     PROP.  V.    PROP. 


F     a  Jlraight 
line  be  divided 


into  two  equal 
parts  and alfo  ^ 

into  two  unequal  parts, 
the  reSlangle  contained  by 
the  unequal  parts,  together  with  the  fquare  of  the  line  between 
the  points  of  fe 51  ion,  is  equal  to  the  fquare  of  half  that  line 


+ 


Defcribe    IIHIH   (pr.  46,  B.  i.),  draw 
^  — II    — -- 


and 


) 


II 


(pr.3i,B.i.) 


(p.  36,  B.  I.) 
■  -    H  (p.  43.  B.  I.) 


(ax.  2.) 


I- 


BOOK  II.    PROP.  r.     THEOR. 


59 


but 


and 


-  (cor.  pr.  4.  B.  2.) 


(conft.) 


/.  (ax.  2.) 


ifl.F- 


+ 


Q.  E.  D. 


6o 


BOOK  II.  PROP.  VI.     THEOR. 


F  a  Jlraight  line  be 
bifeSled  ■ 

and  produced  to  any 

point  —^wmmmt  , 

the  reSlangle  contained  by  the 
whole  line  fo  increafed,  and  the 
part  produced,  together  with  the 
fquare  of  half  the  line,  is  equal 
to  the  fquare  of  the  line  made  up 
of  the  half,  and  the  produced  part . 


Defcribe 


(pr.  46,  B.  I.),  draw 
II 


and 


(pr.  3i,B.  1.) 


(prs.  36,  43,  B.  I  ) 


but  ^H    = 


(cor.  4,  B.  2.) 


+ 


(conft.ax.2.) 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  11.    PROP.  VII.    THEOR. 

F  a  Jlraight  line  be  divided 
into  any  two  parts  wbmw^—  , 
the  fq liar es  of  the  whole  line 
and  one  of  the  farts  are 
equal  to  twice  the  rectangle  contained  by 
the  whole  line  and  that  part,  together 
•with  the  fquare  of  the  other  parts. 


6i 


Defcribe 
Draw  - 


and 


■  ■^■■■■« 


,  (pr.  46,  B.  I.)- 
(poft.   I.), 

(pr.  31,  B.  !.)• 


—  I  (pr-  43.  -B.  I.), 
add  ■  =    ■-'  to  both,  (cor.  4,  B-  2.) 


I 


(cor.  4,  B.  2.) 


I 


+  ■  + 


+ 


■'  +  — ^  = 


+  

Q.  E.  D. 


62 


BOOK  II.     PROP.  VIII.    THEOR. 


E3 


F  ajlraight  line  be  divided 

Into     any     two     parts 

,  the  fquare  of 

thefum  of  the  whole  line 

and  any  one  of  Its  parts.  Is  equal  to 

four  times  the  reSlangle  contained  by 

the  whole  line,  and  that  part  together 

with  the  fquare  of  the  other  part. 


—   + 


Produce 


and  make 


Conftrudl 
draw 


J         (pr.  46,  B.  1.); 


(pr.  31,  B.  I.) 


but  ^  + 


(pr.  4,  B.  II.) 

-^  z=  2.  — 

(pr.  7,  B.  II .) 


•-+    — ^ 

+    °-' 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  11.    PROP.  IX.    THEOR. 

F  a  Jlraight 
line  be  divided 
into  two  equal 
parts  ^—     — ,.j  y 


63 


and  alfo  into  two  unequal 

parts     ^mmm^'^^m— 


^  the 

fquares    of   the    unequal 

parts  are  together  double 

the  fquares  of  half  the  line, 

and  of  the  part  between  the  points  offedlion. 

^    +  ^=    2 ^    +    2 


Make  — ■  _L   and   r=   — 

Draw    "..-.—«—    and 

— II ,— II  


or 


and  draw 


=  4 

4.  =  ^ 


(pr.  5,  B.I.)    ^   half  a  right  angle, 
(cor.  pr.  32,  B.  i.) 

(pr.  5,  B.  I.)    =:    half  a  right  angle, 
(cor.  pr.  32,  B.  i.) 

^   a  right  angle. 


4^ 


lence 


(prs.  5,  29,  B.   I.). 

wmmimtm^m^     ■■■■■* 

(prs.  6,  34,  B.  I.) 


+ 


^or  + 


I 
I  ■ 

+ 


\ 


(pr.  47,  B.  I.) 


+    2    

Q.  E.  D. 


64 


BOOK  II.     PROP.  X.     THEOR. 


F  a  Jlraight  line 
■  be  bi- 
feBed  and  pro- 
duced to  any  point 
•  — ,  thefquaresofthe 
•whole  produced  line,  and  of 
the  produced  part,  are  toge- 
ther double  of  the  fquares  of 
the  half  litie,  and  of  the  line 
made  up  of  the  half  and  pro- 
duced part. 


+ 


+  ^ 


Make 


and 


■—    J_    and    =1    to 
draw    ^MvatMit    and 


or 

-  f 


(pr.  31,  B.  I.); 


draw 


alfo. 


4 


(pr.  5,  B.  I.)  =  half  a   right  angle, 
(cor.  pr.  32,  B.  i .) 

(pr.   5,  B.    I.)   =   half  a  right  angle 
(cor.  pr.  32,  B.  i.) 


4. 


m    a  right  angle. 


BOOK  II.    PROP.  X.    THEOR.  6^ 

half  a  right  angle  (prs.  5,  32,  29,  34,  B.  i.), 


and 


.-..,  (prs.  6,  34,  B.  I.).     Hence  by  (pr.  47,  B.  i.) 

Q.  E.  D. 


66 


BOOK  II.    PROP.  XI.    PROP. 


O  divide  a  given  fir aight  line  -^^■■» 
in  fuch  a  manner,  that  the  reB angle 
contained  by  the  whole  line  and  one 
of  its  parts  may  be  equal  to   the 


fquare  of  the  other. 


Defcribe 

make    «««■ 


1 1  ■   •     «*»■  a 


n 


draw 


take 


on 


defcribe 


(pr.  46,  B,  I.), 
-    (pr.  10,  B.  I.), 


(pr.  3,  B.  I.), 


(pr.  46,  B.  I.), 


Produce 


—  (poft.  2.). 


Then,  (pr.  6,  B.  2.) 
2  _  i 


+ 


•  •■■••■■ 


■"■',   or, 


I 


Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  II.    PROP.  XII    THEOR. 


67 


N  any  obtufe  angled 
triangle,  thefquare 
of  the  fide  fubtend- 
ing  the  obtufe  angle 
exceeds  the  fiim  of  the  fquares 
of  the  fides  containing  the  ob- 
tufe angle,  by  twice  the  rec- 
tangle contained  by  either  of 
thefe  fides  andthe  produced  parts 
of  the  fa?ne  from  the  obtufe 
angle  to  the  perpendicular  let 
fall  on  it  from  the  oppofite  acute 
angle. 


+ 


''  by 


^    + 


2  • 


+ 


By  pr.  4,  B.  2. 
^  + >  +  2 

add    — — —  ^    to  both 
2  _  V 


(pr.  47,  B.  I.) 


+ 


+ 


•  or 


■ ;   hence  ' 
by   2 


'^    (pr.  47,  B.  I.).     Therefore, 

^  •  ' -"■  +  '   + 


Q.  E.  D. 


68 


BOOK  II.    PROP.  XIII.    THEOR. 


FIRST. 


SECOND. 


^m 

F^ 

p^ 

Br^/^ 

^ 

N  any  tri- 
angle, the 
fquareofthe 
Jidefubtend- 
ing  an  acute  angle,  is 
lefs  than  the  fum  of  the 
fquares  of  the  Jides  con- 
taining that  angle,  by  twice  the  reSlangle  contained  by  either 
of  thefe  fides,  and  the  part  of  it  intercepted  between  the  foot  of 
the  perpendicular  let  fall  on  it  from  the  oppofte  angle,  and  the 
angular  point  of  the  acute  angle. 


FIRST. 
+  ■ *  by  2 


SECOND. 
.'  -I *by  2 


+ 


2  • 


Firft,  fuppofe  the  perpendicular  to  fall  within  the 

triangle,  then  (pr.  7,  B.  2.) 
^■■■>  °  -|-  ^^^—  ^  ^  2  •  ^^i^^"»«  •  — —  -^  ■■■• 

add  to  each    ^ihi^'^   then, 
I.....  "■  -|-  _•  ^4-  -  =  2  •  ■—  •  - 

+    '    +     « 

/.  (pr-  47.  B.  I.) 


+ 


BOOK  11.   PROP.  XIII.    THEOR.  69 

and    .*.  ^    Z]   ^— "— -    +  —  -    by 

2  •  -■"  •  ■■■-■i™ . 

Next  fuppofe  the  perpendicular  to  fall  without  the 
triangle,  then  (pr.  7,  B.  2.) 

add  to  each    — ■— ■  -    then 

+ ^   +    2    ...    (pr.  47,  B.  I.), 

■J         1         <2     ^_      „  I  a 

1^—  -|-     -^.—  ^      2    •    ^mM»»  .    _l-_      -J-  ', 

Q.  E.  D. 


7° 


BOO  A'  //.    PROP.  XIV.    PROB. 


O    draw  a   right   line  of 
•which  the  fquare  flmll  be 
equal  to   a  given    reSli- 
linear  figure . 


fuch  that. 


Make    ^^^^H    =    ^^V      (pr.  45,  B.  i.), 

produce  "•-  until  — — -■.  :=  • 

take  -■■■.«—-  ^  i^— —  (pr.  10,  B.  i.), 

Defcribe    f  \     (poft.  3.), 

and  produce  -^^—    to  meet  it :  draw    — — ^—  , 

(pr.  5,  B.  2.), 
but    —  ■    =         '     '  "   +    — "— -(pr.  47,  B.  I.); 

•        wmmm^t"     ^I     ■■■■■■   •    «■»«  ,      and 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III. 


DEFINITIONS. 
I. 

QUAL   circles   are   thofe  whofe   diameters  are 
equal. 


II. 


A  right  line  is  said  to  touch  a  circle 
when  it  meets  the  circle,  and  being 
produced  does  not  cut  it. 


III. 

Circles  are  faid  to  touch  one  an- 
other which  meet  but  do  not  cut 
one  another. 


IV. 

Right  lines  are  faid  to  be  equally 
diftant  from  the  centre  of  a  circle 
when  the  perpendiculars  drawn  to 
them  from  the  centre  are  equal. 


72 


DEFINITIONS. 


And  the  ftraight  line  on  which  the  greater  perpendi- 
cular falls  is  faid  to  be  farther  from  the  centre. 


VI. 

A  fegment  of  a  circle  is  the  figure  contained 
by  a  ftraight  line  and  the  part  of  the  circum- 
ference it  cuts  off. 

VII. 

An  angle  in  a  fegment  is  the  angle  con- 
tained by  two  ftraight  lines  drawn  from  any 
point  in  the  circumference  of  the  fegment 
to  the  extremities  of  the  ftraight  line  which 
is  the  bafe  of  the  fegment. 

VIII. 

An  angle  is  faid  to  ftand  on  the  part  of 

;   the  circumference,  or  the  arch,  intercepted 

between  the  right  lines  that  contain  the  angle. 

IX. 

A  fed:or  of  a  circle  is  the  figure  contained 
by  two  radii  and  the  arch  between  them. 


DEFINITIONS. 


11 


Similar  fegments  of  circles 
are  thofe  which  contain 
equal  angles. 


Circles   which  have  the  fame  centre  are 
called  concentric  circles. 


74 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  I.     PROB. 


O  Jind  the  centre  of  a  given 
circle 


o 


Draw  within  the  circle  any  ftraight 


Hne  — ^ 

draw 
hi  left    . 


ma 


ke. 


i^MMMi  ^    and    the    point    of 
biledtion  is  the  centre. 

For,  if  it  be  pofTible,  let  any  other 
point  as  the  point  of  concourfe  of  .^— —  ,  ---..--- 
and   — .— —   be  the  centre. 


Becaufe  in 


and 


■  ----—  (J'^yp-  ^""^  2*  I J  def.  15.) 
--    (conft.)  and    ••■-    common, 

^B.  I,  pr.  8.),   and  are  therefore  right 


angles ;  but 


^  =  ^_|  (con 


ft. 


(ax.  I  I .) 


which  is  abfurd ;  therefore  the  aflumed  point  is  not  the 
centre  of  the  circle  ;  and  in  the  fame  manner  it  can  be 
proved  that  no  other  point  which  is  not  on  — ^^— •  is 
the  centre,  therefore  the  centre  is  in  ^— ^^— ,  and 
therefore  the   point  where    1  is    bifedled   is    the 

centre. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.     PROP.  11.     THEOR. 


75 


STRAIGHT  line  C—) 
joining  two  points  in  the 
circumference    of   a    circle 


lies  ivholly  within  the  circle. 


Find  the  centre  of 


o 


(B.S-pr.i.); 


from  the  centre  draw 


to  any  point  in 


meeting  the  circumference  from  the  centre  ; 
draw  — — —  and  . 


Then 


=    -^     (B.  i.pr.  5.) 


but 


or 


CZ    ^    (B.  I.  pr.  16.) 
(B.  I.  pr.  19.) 


but 


.*.   every  point  in 


lies  within  the  circle. 
Q.  E.  D. 


76 


BOOK  III.     PROP.  III.    THEOR. 


Draw 


F  a  Jlraight  line  ( 
drawn  through  the  centre  of  a 


circle 


o 


bife£lsachord 


(  •'•■)  which  does  not  paj's  through 

the  centre,  it  is  perpendicular  to  it;   or, 
if  perpendicular  to  it,  it  bifeSls  it. 


and 


to  the  centre  of  the  circle. 


In    >^       I    and    L..._V 


■•  •■  ■■» 


and  ,*, 


m^^^  common,  and 

=  (B.  1.  pr.  8.) 

_L    -..«.-  (B.  I.  def.  7.) 


Again  let 
Then  in 


J  and   L^„..T^ 


(B.  i.pr.  5.) 

(hyp.) 


and 


and  .*. 


(B.  I.  pr.  26.) 


bifedts 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  HI.    PROP.  IF.     THEOR. 


11 


F  in  a  circle  tiaojlraight  lines 
cut  one  another,  which  do 
not  both  pafs  through  the 
centre,  they  do  not  bifeSl  one 


another. 


If  one  of  the  lines  pafs  through  the 
centre,  it  is  evident  that  it  cannot  be 
bifecfted  by  the  other,  which  does  not 
pafs  through  the  centre. 


But  if  neither  of  the  Hnes  — =— ^^—  or  •— ^-i— 
pafs  through  the  centre,  draw    ——----. 
from  the  centre  to  their  interfedlion. 

If  «i^^^  be  bileded,  ._._._  _L  to  it  (6.  3.  pr.  3.) 
.*.    ^^    =    I  ^    and  if  —    be 


bifed:ed, 


(B.  3-  P'--  3-) 


and  .*, 


5   a  part 


equal  to  the  whole,  which  is  abfurd  : 
.*.   — —— —   and  — — — • 


do  not  biiecfl  one  another. 


Q.  E.  D. 


w* 


78 


BOOK  III.     PROP.   V.     THEOR. 


F    two    circles 
interfeSl,  they  have  not  the 


(0) 


Janie  centre. 


Suppofe  it  poflible  that  two  interfedting  circles  have  a 
common  centre  ;  from  fiich  fuppofed  centre  draw  ^.i^.. 
to  the  interfering  point,  and  ^^—^— ••■--■■ 
the  circumferences  of  the  circles. 


meetmg 


Then 
and    <— 


(B.  i.def  15.) 
-    (B.  I.  def.  15.) 
«»-  J    a  part 


equal  to  the  whole,  which  is  abfurd : 

.',  circles  fuppofed  to  interfedl  in  any  point  cannot 

have  the  fame  centre. 

Q,E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  VL     THEOR. 


79 


F  tivo  circles 


touch 


one  another  internally,  they 


have  not  the  fame  ce?itre. 


For,  if  it  be  poffible,  let  both  circles  have  the   fame 
centre;  from  fuch  a  fuppofed  centre  draw   ---■» 
cutting  both  circles,  and  ■— — ^—  to  the  point  of  contadl. 


Then 
and    — 


(B.  i.def.  15.) 
(B.  I.def.  15.) 
J    a  part 


equal  to  the  whole,  which  is  abfurd  ; 
therefore  the  aiTumed  point  is  not  the  centre  of  both  cir- 
cles ;  and  in  the  fame  manner  it  can  be  demonftrated  that 
no  other  point  is. 

g  E.  D. 


8o 


BOOK  HI.     PROP.  FII.    THEOR. 


nCURE  1. 


FIGURE  II. 


F  Jt'om  any  point  within  a  circle 


which  is  not  the  centre,  lines 


o 


are  drawn  to  the  circumference ;  the  greatejl  of  thofe 
lines  is  that  (-i^.«i"»)  which  pajfes  through  the  centre, 
and  the  leaf   is  the  remaining  part  (  ^  of  the 

diameter. 

Of  the  others,  that  ( ^— ■— — >  )  which  is  nearer  to 
the  line  pafing  through  the  centre,  is  greater  than  that 
(  mmmmm^^  )  wliich  Is  itiore  remote. 


Fig.  2.     The  two  lines  (• 


and 


) 


which  make  equal  angles  with  that  pafpng  through  the 
centre,  on  oppofite  fdes  of  it,  are  equal  to  each  other;  and 
there  cannot  be  drawn  a  third  line  equal  to  them,  from 
the  fame  point  to  the  circumference. 


FIGURE  I. 

To  the  centre  of  the  circle  draw —-——  and  -— «--  — j 
then  "— -—  rr  —..—..  (B.  i.  def.  15.) 
......i^Mi  ^  ^^—  -|-  ...«>.  C  — — ^-»  (B.I .  pr.  20.) 

in  like  manner  — — — (•  may  be  fhewn  to  be  greater  than 
.i.M__- ,  or  any  other  line  drawn  from  the  fame  point 


to  the  circumference.     Again,  by  (B.  i.  pr.  20.) 

take  — —  from  both  ;   /.   — — —  CI  ....1^—  (ax.), 
and  in  like  manner  it  may  be  fhewn  that  — ^— ^  is  lefs 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  VII.    THEOR.  8i 

thiin  any  other  line  drawn  from  the  fame  point  to  the  cir- 


cumference.    Again,  in   y*/     and 


common,  ^^    [^    IV ,  and 


(B.  I.  pr.  24.)  and 


may  in  like  manner  be  proved  greater  than  any  other  line 
drawn  from  the  fame  point  to  the  circumference  more 
remote  from  -——■-, 


FIGURE  II. 

If  ^=^. hen =  ,if„o. 

take  — — ^—   r=  ^— —  draw  '■"■'■,  then 

^c— 'I       :>»^ 

in      ^^    I    and    I       ,^^       ,   — —  common. 


(B.  i.pr.  4.) 


a  part  equal  to  the  whole,  which  is  abfurd : 
■"— —  IS  *  and  no  other  line  is  equal  to 

■^  drawn  from  the  fame  point  to   the  circumfer- 


ence ;  for  if  it  were  nearer  to  the  one  pafling  through  the 
centre  it  would  be  greater,  and  if  it  were  more  remote  it 
would  be  lefs. 

Q.  E.  D. 


M 


82 


nOOK  HI.    PROP.  nil.     THEOR. 


The  original  text  of  this  propolition  is  here  divided  into 
three  parts. 


I. 


^Voll  ^^  f''°'"  ''  P°'"^  without  a  circle,  Jlraight 

iiKCs  \  — — —       \  ore  (jrd'wn  to 


V»y 


the  cir- 


cu/nference ;  of  thofe  falling  upon  the  concave  circum- 
ference the  greatejl  is  that  (  — »)  ichich  fafja 
through  the  centre,  and  the  line  (  i  )  ichich  is 
nearer  the  greatejl  is  greater  than  that  (  ) 
'ichich  is  more  remote. 


Draw 


and  .■■-..>...  to  the  centre. 


Then.  ■— .    which    pallcs    through   the  centre,    is 

greatcll;    for   fince   — — nz ,    it  ^-^-^— 

be  added  to  both.  -•■-■   ^   — ^—    -|-    ; 

l^iit  C  — — —  {^-  1-  P'-  -^•)  •'-  — — —  is  greater 
than  ;inv  other  line  dr.iwn  from  the  fame  point  to  the 
concave  circumference. 


Again  in 


and 


BOOK  rrr.  prop.  nir.  tiikor 

and  — ^— ^  common,  Init 


0 


(B.  I.  pr.  24.); 


and  in  like  manner 


may  be  Ihcwn   ZZ   t'l-"!  -^'7 


other  line  more  remote  from 


II. 

Of  thofc  lines  falling  on  the  convex  circumference  the 
leaf  is  that  (————)  which  being  produced  would 
pafs  through  the  centre,  and  the  line  which  is  nearer  to 
the  lea/l  is  Icf  than  that  which  is  more  remote. 


For,  fince  — — —  -j- 
and 


/« 


And  again,  fince  — —  -|- 

h  (B.  i.pr.  21.), 

and  — —   rs  . 


— — -,     And  lb  of  others. 


III. 


Alfo  the  lines  making  equal  angles  with  that  which 
pajjes  through  the  centre  arc  equal,  whether  /ailing  on 
the  concave  or  convex  circumfrence  ;  and  no  third  line 
can  he  drinvn  equal  to  the/n  from  the  f<imc  point  to  the 
circumference. 


Forif  •■ 
make 


•— ^    C  "■"•"",  Init  making  ^  =:  ^  ; 

-----      ^      -----   ^    ;iml     tl|;l\V     ......  -.^ 


84 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  Fin.    THEOR. 


Then  in 


and 


)    and   / 


; 


/ 


we  have 


common,  and  alfo   ^    =:     41, 
-  =  (B.  I.  pr.  4.); 


but 


which  is  abfurd. 


of 


■  ■■iisBisB  IS  not  Z!Z 
-----  —  9   .*.   --■■ 


-,  nor  to  any  part 

is  not  r~    — -----^ 


Neither  is 


'—    ,  they  are 


to  each  other. 


And  any  other  line  drawn  from  the  fame  point  to  the 
circumference  muft  He  at  the  fame  fide  with  one  of  thefe 
lines,  and  be  more  or  lefs  remote  than  it  from  the  line  pall- 
ing through  the  centre,  and  cannot  therefore  be  equal  to  it. 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  in.    PROP.  IX.    THEOR. 


85 


F  a  point  be  taken  ivithin  a 
circle  (  ]  ,  from  which 


o- 


more    thwi    two    equal  Jlraight    lines 

can  be  drawn  to  the  circumference^  that 
point  tnuji  be  the  ceiitre  of  the  circle. 

For,  if  it  be  fuppofed  that  the  point  |^ 
in  which  more  than  two  equal  ftraight 
lines  meet  is  not  the  centre,  fome  other 
point   — ..   muft  be;  join  thefe  two  points  by 
and  produce  it  both  ways  to  the  circumference. 


Then  fince  more  than  two  equal  ftraight  lines  are  drawn 
from  a  point  which  is  not  the  centre,  to  the  circumference, 
two  of  them  at  leall;  muft  lie  at  the  fame  fide  of  the  diameter 


.;  and  fince  from  a  point 


/\ 


w 


hich 


is 


not  the  centre,  ftraight  lines  are  drawn  to  the  circumference ; 

the  greateft  is  -i^— .--=  =  ^  which  pafies  through  the  centre  : 

and  — ^— — —  which  is  nearer  to  ^^■—••«'.  |^    ———~- 

which  is  more  remote  (B.  3.  pr.  8.) ; 

but  — — — ^—  rr    ^— ^— =-   (hyp.)  which  is  abfurd. 

The  fame  may  be  demonftrated  of  any  other  point,  dif- 
ferent from  /  |\^  which  muft  be  the  centre  of  the  circle, 

Q.  E.  D. 


86 


BOOK  III.     PROP.  X.    THEOR. 


NE  circle  I        }    cannot  interfeSl  another 
I        J   /«  more  points  than  two. 


For,  if  it  be  poffible,  let  it  interfedl  in  three  points ; 
from  the  centre  of  (  I  draw 


O 


to  the  points  of  interfedlion ; 


(B.  I.  def.  15.), 

but  as  the  circles  interfedl,  they  have  not  the  fame 
centre  (B.  3.  pr.  5.) : 


.*,  the  alTumed  point  is  not  the  centre  of 


o. 


and 


and 


are  drawn 


from  a  point  not  the  centre,  they  are  not  equal  (B.  3. 
prs.  7,  8) ;  but  it  was  fhewn  before  that  they  were  equal, 
which  is  abfurd ;  the  circles  therefore  do  not  interfedl  in 
three  points. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XL    THEOR. 


87 


F    two    circles 


o 


o 


and 


touch  one  another 


internally,  the  right  line  joining  their 
centres,  being  produced,  Jliall pafs  through 
a  point  of  contaSl. 


For,  if  it  be  poffible,  let 


join  their  centres,  and  produce  it  both 
ways ;    from  a  point  of  contadl  draw 

— — —  to  the  centre  of  (       J  ,  and  from  the  fame  point 
of  contadl  draw  -•-•--—  to  the  centre  of  I  J . 


Becaufe  in 


4 


+ 


■■■•■•■•t 


(B.  I .  pr.  20.), 


and 


o 


as  they  are  radii  of 


8B  BOOK  III.    PROP.  XI.     THEOR. 

but  — ^  -|-         I  rr   — — — ;  take 

away  — — —  which  is  common, 

hut    — i^— i    ^    --  — --^ 


ii  of  r^ , 


becaufe  they  are  radi 

and   ,*,  --»-"    C   ^^   ^   P^i't  greater  than   the 

whole,  which  is  abfurd. 

Tlie  centres  are  not  therefore  fo  placed,  that  a  line 
joining  them  can  pafs  through  any  point  but  a  point  of 
contadt. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XII.     THEOR. 


89 


F  two  circles 


o 


t/ier    externally,    the   Jiraight    line 
1 1  joining  their  centres, 

pajfes  through  the  point  of  contaB. 


touch  one  a7io 


If  it  be  polTible,  let 


join  the  centres,  and 


not  pafs  through  a  point  of  contadl ;   then  from  a  point  of 
contad:  draw   -"^^^==  and   ""■••^■^-'  '-•  to  the  centres. 


Becaufe 

and    . 
and    • 


. + 


(B.  I.  pr.  20.), 

=    (B.  I.  def.  15.), 

=    ^    (B.  I.  def.  15.), 


+ 


',   a  part  greater 


than  the  whole,  which  is  abfurd. 


The  centres  are  not  therefore  fo  placed,  that  <-he  line 
joining  them  can  pafs  through  any  point  but  the  point  of 
contadl. 


Q.E.  D. 


90  BOOK  in.    PROP.  XIIL     THEOR. 


FIGURE  I. 


FIGURE  II. 


FIGURE  III. 


NE  circ/e  can- 
not touch  ano- 
ther, either 
externally    or 

internally,  in  more  points 

than  one. 


Fig.  I .    For,  if  it  be  poffible,  let 
and    f        1   touch     one 


o 


another  internally   in   two  points ; 
draw   — — -  joining  their  cen- 
tres,  and  produce  it  until  it  pafs 
through  one  of  the  points  of  contadl  (B.  3.  pr.  11.); 
draw   — — —  and  •^— ^—^  , 


.-.  if  


(B.  I.  def  15.), 


be  added  to  both, 
+  


but 
and   .*. 


+ 


+ 

which  is  abfurd. 


.■  (B.  I.  def  15.), 

-   =   — _—  ;   but 
— —  (B.  I.  pr.  20.), 


BOOK  III.     PROP.  XIII.     THEOR.  91 

Fig.  2.  But  if  the  points  of  contadl  be  the  extremities 
of  the  right  line  joining  the  centres,  this  ftraight  line  muft 
be  bifedled  in  two  different  points  for  the  two  centres;  be- 
caufe  it  is  the  diameter  of  both  circles,  which  is  abfurd. 


,  let   f  j  and  I      J 


Fig.  3.     Next,  if  it  be  poffible 


touch  externally  in  two  points;   draw  — — joining 

the  centres  of  the  circles,  and  paffing  through  one  of  the 
points  of  contact,  and  draw  — i— — —    and    -^^— —  , 


— -^    z=  _  (B.  I.  def.  15.); 
nd  ...«■■•.   zr  I  (B.  i.  def.  15.); 


-\-     — — -^      Z:Z.    ■BMBsaaa   *     but 


+  ^-^™''—    C  ».--   (B.  I.  pr.  20.), 


which  is  abfurd. 

There  is  therefore  no  cafe  in  which  two  circles  can 
touch  one  another  in  two  points. 

Q  E.  D. 


92 


BOOK  III.     PROP.  XIV.    THEOR. 


Then 
and 


infcribed  in  a  circle  are  e- 
qually  dijiantfrom  the  centre ; 
andalfofjlraight  lines  equally 
dijiafit  from  the  centre  are  equal. 


From  the  centre  o 


o 


draw 


-L 


to  — 
,join 


■••■■  and  --• 

^—  and  — ■ 


fince 


=   half  '"  (B.  3.  pr.  3.) 

=  i (B.  3-pr-3-) 

=  — (hyp.) 


and 


(B.  I.  def.  15.) 


and 


but  fince    >-  s^   is  a  right  angle 

=   '   +   MB.i.pr.47-) 

.'    =     '    +     ^   for  the 


.% -^  + 


fame  reafon. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XIV.    THEOR.  93 


Alfo,    if   the    lines  1     ..■.•»■    and    •— i»«...«.r      be 

equally  diflant  from  the  centre ;   that  is  to  fay,  if  the  per- 
pendiculars -■-■•■■■■■■  and  -m........   be  given  equal,  then 


For,  as  in  the  preceding  cafe, 


.    ^   :::=    __i.^,  and  the  doubles  of  thefe 
.......   and    ^n.......  are  alfo  equal. 

Q.  E.  D. 


94 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XV.     THEOR. 


FIGURE  I. 


but 


HE  diameter  is  the  greatejl  Jiraight 
line  in  a  circle  :   and,  of  all  others, 
that  which  is  neareji  to  the  centre  is 
greater  than  the  more  remote. 


FIGURE  I. 
The  diameter  ^^  is  CZ  any  line 

For  draw  '  and   •••••••••• 

Then   .••■>••»■■>    ^   ^— ^._i 
and    •^— ^—  =  — — —  . 


mXm         ■■■■•»««»        ^^ 


■■■•■■•■• 


(B.  I .  pr.  20.) 


Again,  the  Hne  which   is  nearer  the  centre  is  greater 
than  the  one  more  remote. 

Firft,  let  the  given  lines  be    — — ^  and -  , 

wnich  are  at  the  fame  fide  of  the  centre  and  do 
not  interfed: ; 

draw  J  ' 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XF.     THEOR. 


95 


FIGURE  II. 
Let  the  given  lines  be    ■^— ^  and    ^i— ^ 
which  either  are  at  different  fides  of  the  centre, 
orinterfedt;  from  the  centre  draw   - -■•-- 

and    -»-«-—-  J_    -^^Mi->i»  and  , 


FIGURE  II. 


make 
draw 


Since 


and 


the  centre, 
but  — — — 


and 


are  equally  diflant  from 
(B.  3.  pr.  14.); 


(Pt.  i.B.  3.pr.  15.), 


Q.  E.  D. 


96 


500 A'  ///.    PROP.  XVI.     THEOR. 


llEJiraiglit 
line  - 

draii-n 
from   the 
extremity  of  the  diame- 


ter 


of  a 


circle 


h 


perpendicular  to  it  falls 
••.^^  ^,.,     without  the  circle. 

||»  •  '^  *  And  if  anyjlraight 

***  line     ........      be 

drawn  from    a   point 
—————    within    that  perpendi- 


cular to  the  point  of  contaB,  it  cuts  the  circle. 

PART  I 

If  it  be  poffible,  let  ^  which  meets  the  circle 

again,  be  _L  ,  and  draw  , 


Then,  becaufe 


^  =  ^  (B.  i.pr.  5.), 
and  .'.   each  of  these  angles  is  acute.   (B.  i.  pr.  17.) 

but    ^^   =r     I J  (hyp.),  which  is  abfurd,  therefore 

ii...._    drawn   _L   — ^^^—  does  not  meet 
the  circle  again. 


BOOK  in.    PROP.  XVI.     THEOR.  97 

PART  11. 

Let  — Bi*—"—  be  _L  -^-^^—  and  let  -— — -  be 
drawn  from  a  point  y  between  — ■— ■— •  and  the 
circle,  which,  if  it  be  poflible,  does  not  cut  the  circle. 

Becaufe  H^  =:  |    ^  , 

.*.    ^^    is  an  acute  angle  ;  fuppofe 
....... ...4....  _L    .-■«•-•-,  drawn  from  the  centre  of  the 

circle,  it  mufl;  fall  at  the  fide  of    ^^    the  acute  angle. 
,*,  B^^  which  is  fuppofed  to  be  a  right  angle,  is  C   ^^; 


but  ............  =  , 

and   .*,  --••••..    ^    ......«..■—,   a   part   greater   than 

the  whole,  which   is  abfurd.     Therefore   the  point  does 
not  fail  outfide  the  circle,  and  therefore  the  ftraight  line 
■  ••••MiM*  cuts  the  circle. 

Q.  E.  D. 


98 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XVII.     THEOR. 


O  Jraiv  a  tangent  to  a  given 
circle    \  \    from   a 


o 


given  point,  either  in  or  outjide  of  its 
'•♦^    circumference. 


If  the  given  point  be  in  the  cir- 
cumference, as  at   I ,  it  is  plain  that 

the  ftraight  line  "■■"   J_  -«— — - 
the  radius,  will  be  the  required  tan- 
gent (B.   3.   pr.    16.)      But  if  the   given   point     ^ 
outlide  of  the  circumference,  draw   — 

from  it  to  the  centre,  cutting 


be 


draw  •■««■■■■**    ^_ 


concentric  with 
then 


o 


..,  defcribe 


radius^   .■■■■ub^, 
will  be  the  tangent  required. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XFII.     THEOR. 


99 


XV 


/ 


/ 


For 


in 


and  i\. 


,  ^^^    common, 


(B.  I.  pr.  4.)   flB    =:  ^^^    ^  a  right  angle, 
.*.  ^a^a^B   is  a  tangent  to 

Q.  E.  D. 


o 


loo        BOOK  III.     PROP.  XFIII.    THEOR. 


and    .*, 


F  a  right  line  •• —  be 

a  tangent  to  a  circle,  the 
fir aight  line  — ^—  draivn 
from     the     centre     to    the 
i  point  of  contaSl,  is  perpendicular  to  it. 


For,  if  it  be  poflible, 
let  *>■  be  ^  — ... 


then  becaufe 


=  [^ 


is  acute    (B.  i .  pr.  17.) 

c 


(B.  I.  pr.  19.); 


but 


»•*•■  ,  a  part  greater  than 


the  whole,  which  is  ablurd. 


/,  .»«..   is  not  _L  -"•—•••5  and  in  the  fame  man- 

ner   it    can    be    demonftrated,  that  no  other  line  except 
— ■— —  is  perpendicular  to  «•-.■...-•  , 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III    PROP.  XIX.     THEOR. 


lOI 


F  a  Jlra'tght  line 


be  a  tangent  to  a  circle, 
thejiraight  line  , 

drawn  perpendicular  to  it 

from  point  of  the  contact,  pajfes  through 

the  centre  of  the  circle. 

For,  if  it  be  pofTible,  let  the  centre 


be  without   « 


and  draw 


•  ••-    from  the  fuppofed  centre 
to  the  point  of  contadl. 


Becaufe 


X 


(B.  3.pr.  i8.) 

.'.    ^^  =:   I Ji ,  a  right  angle  ; 

but    ffj^   =    I      1  (hyp.)'  and  /.     ^  = 

a  part  equal  to  the  whole,  which  is  abfurd. 


Therefore  the  affumed  point  is  not  the  centre ;  and  in 
the  fame  manner  it  can  be  demonftrated,  that  no  other 
point  without     _„_^  is  the  centre. 


Q.  E.  D. 


102 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XX.    rUEOR. 


FIGURE  I 


HE  angle  at  the  centre  of  a  circle,  is  double 
the  angle  at  the  circumference,  when  they 
have  the  fame  part  of  the  circumference  for 
their  bafe. 


FIGURE  I. 
Let  the  centre  of  the  circle  be  on 


a  fide  of    ^  , 


Becaufe 


i  =  ^ 


=     ^   (B.  i.pr.5.). 


But 


+ 


\ 


or 


=:    twice      .     (B.  i.  pr.  32). 


FIGURE  II. 


FIGURE  II. 

Let  the  centre  be  within    ^       ^  the  angle  at  the 
circumference ;    draw   ■■■^^^—    from  the  angular 
point  through  the  centre  of  the  circle  ; 

then   ^     :=    r     ?  and  =    ^^  , 

becaufe  of  the  equality  of  the  fides  (B.  i.  pr.  5). 


BOOK  III.   PROP.  XX.    THEOR.  103 


Hence 


-|-   ^  -|~  "I"  ^  twice 

But  ^  =  ^  +  ^  ,  and 


r=   twice 


FIGURE  III. 
Let  the  centre  be  without    W    and 


FIGURE  III. 


draw   m^ 

the  diameter. 

B( 

jcaufe    ▼ 

:  twice     ^  ;  i 

r= 

twice 

^^  (cafe  I .) ; 

• 
•    • 

A 

^   twice    ▼  , 

Q.  E.  D. 


I04         BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXI.     THEOR. 


FIGURE  I. 


HE    angles  (  ^^  ,    ^^  )  in   the  fame 
Jegment  of  a  circle  are  equal. 


FIGURE  I. 
Let  the  fegment  be  greater  than  a  femicircle,  and 
draw   — ^^^—   and  — — — —   to  the  centre. 


twice    ^^    or  twice 

(B.  3.  pr.  20.),- 

4  =  4 


4 


FIGURE  II. 


FIGURE  II. 
Let   the  fegment  be  a  femicircle,  01   lefs  than  a 
femicircle,  draw  —— —   the  diameter,  alfo  draw 


^=4a„dV    =    ^ 


(cafe  I.) 


Q.  E.  D. 


J 


BOOK  III.     PROP.  XXII.     THEOR.         105 


HE  oppojite  arigJes 


Af 


and         ^^  .  ^^1    and 

^r       of  any  quadrilateral  figure  in- 
fcr'ibed  in  a  circle,  are  together  equal  to 
two  right  angles. 


Draw 


and 


the  diagonals ;  and  becaufe  angles  in 

the  fame  fegment  are  equal   ^W  =:   ^^ 
and    ^r       rr:     ^^  | 
add       ^   to  both. 

two  right  angles  (B.  i.  pr.  32.).     In  like  manner  it  may 
be  Ihown  that, 

Q.  E.  D. 


io6        BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXIII.     THEOR. 


PON  t/ie  fame 
Jlraight  line, 
and  upon  the 
fame  fide  of  it, 
two  fmilar  fegments  of  cir- 
cles cannot  be  conflruBed 
which  do  not  coincide. 


For  if  it  be  poflible,  let  two  fimilar  fegments 


o 


and 


be  conftrudled ; 


draw  any  right  line 
draw   « 


•  cutting  both  the  fegments, 
and  ^^-HMM  . 


Becaufe  the  fegments  are  fimilar. 


(B.  3.  def  10.), 


but  ^M      [Z     ^^   (B.  I.  pr.  16.) 

which  is  abfurd  :   therefore  no  point  in  either  of 

the  fegments  falls  without  the  other,  and 

therefore  the  fegments  coincide. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXIV.    THEOR. 


107 


IMILAR 

fegments 


and 


,  of  cir- 


cles upon  equal  Jlraight 
lines  ( '^^^  and  — — ) 
are  each  equal  to  the  other. 


For,  if 
that    — 


be  fo  applied  to 


-  may  fall  on  ^— ^— 
may  be  on  the  extremities 


the  extremities  of 


and 


at  the  fame  fide  as 


becaufe 


muft  wholly  coincide  with 


and    the    fimilar    fegments    being    then    upon    the    fame 

flraight  line  and  at  the  fame  fide  of  it,  muft 

alfo    coincide    (B.   3.   pr.   23.),   and 

are   therefore   equal. 

Q.  E.  D. 


io8 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXV.    PROP. 


SEGMENT    of  a    circle 
being  given,  to  defcribe  the 
circle   of  'which    it   is    the 
feginent. 


From  any  point  in  the  fegment 
draw  ^^— ^  and  — ^^^^  bifeft 
them,  and  from  the  points  of  biledlion 


draw 
and 


where  they  meet  is  the  centre  of  the  circle. 


Becaufe  — ..__  terminated  in  the  circle  is  bifedied 
perpendicularly  by  ^■"■■"^  ,  it  palTes  through  the 
centre  (B.  3.  pr.  i.),  likewife  ^a^^M^  pafles  through 
the  centre,  therefore  the  centre  is  in  the  interfedlion  of 
thefe  perpendiculars. 

Q.E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXVI.     THEOR.  109 


N    egua/  circles 


the  arcs 


O ""'  o 


on  which 


Jiand  equal  angles,  whether  at  the 

centre  or 

circum 

ference,  are  equal. 

Firfl,   let    ^^ 

at  the 

centre. 

Then  fince 

0  = 

mmm                  ^ 

O- 

/\ 

and     ^♦;;.„ 

■•\ 

have 

■  ■■■■■■ 


and 


But 


▲  =▲ 


(B.  i.pr.4.). 


(B.3.pr.  20.); 


•  •  O '"'  o 


are  fimilar  (B.  3.  def.  10.) ; 
they  are  alfo  equal  (B.  3.  pr.  24.) 


110        BOOK  III.     PROP.  XXVI.     THEOR. 

If  therefore    the    equal    fegments  be   taken  from  the 
equal  circles,  the  remaining  fegments  will  be  equal ; 


hence 


(ax.  3.); 


and    .*, 


But  if  the  given  equal  angles  be  at  the  circumference, 
it  is  evident  that  the  angles  at  the  centre,  being  double 
of  thofe  at  the  circumference,  are  alfo  equal,  and  there- 
fore the  arcs  on  which  they  fland  are  equal. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXVn.     THEOR.        1 1 1 


N  equal  circles. 


O-O 


the  angles  and    ^^   which  Jiand  upon  equal 

arches  are  equal,  whether  they  be  at  the  centres  or  at 
the  circumferences. 


For  if  it  be  poffible,  let  one  of  them 


▲ 


be  greater  than  the  other 
and  make 


▲ 


\  =  4 


/.    V_^-"    =    **»n„..«    (B.  3.  pr.  26.) 

but    V«^    =    **♦.....•♦  (hyp.) 

.'.    ^-i_  ^   :=  >fc^  _^^^    a  part  equal 

to  the  whole,  which  is  abfurd ;   .*,  neither  angle 

is   greater  than   the   other,   and 

,*,  they  are  equal. 

Q.  E.  D. 


••••.•■••• 


112       BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXVIII.     THEOR. 


N  equa/  circles 


o-o 


egual    chords 
arches. 


cut    off  equal 


From  the  centres  of  the  equal  circles. 


draw 


and 


and  becaufe 


c=o 


alfo 


(IW-) 


(B.  3.  pr.  26.) 


and 


.0  =  0 


(ax.  3.) 
Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXIX.    THEOR.  113 


N  equal  circles 


nd   ••--    ivhich  fub~     \      ^  ^^      / 


the  chords    ^— -^^    and 
tend  equal  arcs  are  equal. 

If  the  equal  arcs  be  femicircles  the  propofition  is 
evident.     But  if  not, 
let  — ^^i^ .  — — i^ ,  and 


be  drawn  to  the  centres  ; 


becaufe 

and 
but  ^— — ^  and 


(hyp.) 

(B.3.pr.27.); 

•■»......  and  «•-' 

(B.  I.  pr.  4.); 


but  thefe  are  the  chords  fubtending 
the  equal  arcs. 


Q.  E.  D. 


114 


BOOK  III.     PROP.  XXX.   PROB. 


O     l>ife^     a    given 


n- 


arc 


draw 


Draw 
make   — ^ 
_L    — ^^-■"  ,  and  it  bifedls  the  arc. 


■*•«•■•■ 


Draw   •"••■"»■    and 


and 


— --—    (confl:.), 
is  common, 

(conft.) 
.  (B.  i.pr.4.) 


=    y"*'\     (B.  3-  pr.  28.). 
and  therefore  the  given  arc  is  bifeded. 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXXI.    THEOR.         115 


N  a  circle  the  angle  in  afemicircle  is  a  right 
angle,  the  angle  in  a  fegment  greater  than  a 

femicircle  is  acute,  and  the  angle  in  a  feg- 
ment lefs  than  a  femicircle  is  obtufe. 


FIGURE  I. 


FIGURE  I. 
The  angle         ^    in  a  femicircle  is  a  right  angle. 


V 


Draw 


and 


and 


V 


=     ^    (B.  i.pr.  5.) 


+  A=  V 


^   the  half  of  two 


right  angles  sz  a  right  angle.   (B.  i.  pr.  32.) 


FIGURE  II. 
The  angle  ^^  in  a  fegment  greater  than  a  femi- 
circle is  acute. 


FIGURE  II. 


Draw 


the  diameter,  and  .- 
^   a  right  angle 

^^    is  acute. 


ii6    BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXXI.    THEOR. 


FIGURE  III. 


FIGURE  III. 
The  angle    ^^^^   in  a  fegment  lefs  than  femi- 

circle  is  obtufe. 

Take  in  the  oppofite  circumference  any  point,  to 
which  draw   «mmm*    and  . 


^ 


Becaufe    W^      -|- 

(B.  3.  pr.  22.) 


^Oh 


but 


(part  2.), 


is  obtufe. 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXXIL     THEOR.        117 


F   a   rig/it  line    ^■■■■ii"— ■ 
be  a  tangent  to  a  circle, 
and  frotn  the  point  of  con- 
tact a  right  line        " 
be  drawn  cutting  the  circle,  the  angle 

jg^   made  by  this  line  with  the  tangent 

is  equal  to  the  angle  ^^    in  the  alter- 
ate  fegment  of  the  circle. 


If  the  chord  fhould  pafs  through  the  centre,  it  is  evi- 
dent the  angles  are  equal,  for  each  of  them  is  a  right  angle. 
(B.  3.  prs.  16,  31.) 


But    if  not,    dra'V 


from   the 


point  of  contadl,  it  muft  pafs  through  the  centre  of  the 
circle,  (B.  3.  pr.  19.) 

.-.   ^  =    ^  (B.3.pr.3i.) 

W   +    f    =•    CA   =    f       (B-  I-  pr.  32.) 
/.     ^    =     ^      (ax.). 

Again    CJ        =    iV\    =    _        +    ^ 
(B.  3.  pr.  22.)  ^ 

/.   C. y    =    ^m  »   (ax.),  which  is  the  angle  in 

the  alternate  fegment. 

Q.  E.  D. 


ii8       BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXXIII.    PROP. 


N  a  given  ftraight  line  ^^^— 
to  dejcribe  a  Jegment  of  a 
circle  that  Jliall  contain  an 
angle  equal  to  a  given  angle 


^,ty, 


If  the  given  angle  be  a  right  angle, 
bifedt  the  given  line,  and  defcribe  a 
femicircle  on  it,  this  will  evidently 
contain  a  right  angle.  (B.  3.  pr.  31.) 


If  the  given  angle  be  acute  or  ob- 
tufe,  make  with  the  given  line,  at  its  extremity. 


,   draw 


make 
with 


f 


defcribe 


and 


or    —  '  ■  ■  ■        as  radius, 
for  they  are  equal. 


is  a  tangent  to 


o 


(B.  3.  pr.  16.) 


divides  the  circle  into  two  fegments 


capable   of  containing  angles  equal  to 
/       W     and     j/^     which  were  made  refpedlively  equal 


and 


(B.  3.pr.  32.) 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXXIV.    PROP.  119 


O  cut  off  from  a  given  cir- 


cle 


o 


a   fegment 


which  fiall  contain  an  angle  equal  to  a 


given  angle 


I>raw 


(B.  3.  pr.  17.), 


a  tangent  to  the  circle  at  any  point ; 
at  the  point  of  contad:  make 


and 


> 


the  given  angle  ; 
contains  an  angle   ^    the  given  angle. 


Becaufe 
and   « 


angle  in 


> 


•     IS  a  tangent, 
cuts  it,  the 

(B.  3.  pr.  32.), 


but 


(conft.) 


Q.  E.  D. 


120         BOOK  III.    PROP.  XXXV.    THEOR. 


FIGURE  I. 


FIGURE  II. 


F   two  chords  \ ••••""  i     .^  ^  circle 

interfeSl  each  other,  the  reBangle  contained 
by  the  fegments  of  the  one  is  equal  to  the 
re  51  angle  contained  by  the  fegments  of  the  other. 


FIGURE  I. 
If  the  given  right  lines  pafs  through  the  centre,  they  are 
bifedled  in  the  point  of  interfed:ion,  hence  the  recftangles 
under  their  fegments  are  the  fquares  of  their  halves,  and 
are  therefore  equal. 


FIGURE  II. 
Let  — "— -  pafs  through  the 'centre,  and 

.«■>■.■-    not;    draw    — — — —    and  . 


Then 


X 


or 


»  (B.  2.  pr.  6.), 

X = ' 


X -  = 

■■ (B.  2.  pr.  5.). 


X 


FIGURE  III. 


FIGURE  III. 
Let  neither  of  the  given  lines  pafs  through  the 
centre,  draw  through  their  interfedlion  a  diameter 
........  9 

and   X   =   X 

>■■■•■     (Part.  2.), 

alfo    -    X  =   X 

........    (Part.  2.)  ; 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  III.     PROP.  XXXFI.    THEOR. 


121 


F  from  a  point  without  a  FIGURE  I. 

circle  twojlraight  lines  be 

drawn  to  it,  one  of  which 

— ■'^"»    is  a  tangent  to 
the  circle,  and  the  other  — — -- 
cuts  it ;  the  re^angle  under  the  whole 
cutting    line    —  ••«■•  and    the 

external  fegment    ^-^   is  equal  to 
the  fquare  of  the  tangent  -^—  , 

FIGURE  I. 

Let  — i— ••  pafs  through  the  centre; 

draw  from  the  centre  to  the  point  of  contadl ; 

-   (B.  i.pr.  47), 


minus 


or 


mmus 


(B.2.pr.  6). 


FIGURE  II. 
If   ■"•'■  do    not 

pafs  through  the  centre,  draw 


FIGURE  n. 


and 


Tl 


len 


"X 

minus 


(B.  2.  pr.  6),  that  is. 


mmus 
.2 


(B.  3.pr.  18). 
Q.  E.  D. 


122      BOOK  in.    PROP.  XXXVII.     THEOR. 


but 


F  from  a  point  outfide  of  a 
circle  tivoftraight  lines  be 
draivn,  the  one  -■^-■» 
cutting  the  circle,  the 
other  — — ^  meeting  it,  and  if 
the  reSiangle  contained  by  the  whole 
cutting   line  —"«   and  its  ex- 

ternal fegment  ■-..—..  be  equal  to 
thefquare  of  the  line  meeting  the  circle, 
the  latter  .m.^m^m,—>  is  a  tangent  to 
the  circle. 


Draw  from  the  given  point 
^—  ,   a   tangent  to  the  circle,  and  draw  from  the 
centre    .«»■»,  ••».•«.••,  and    — ---  — -^ 
-■^  = X (B.3.pr.36.) 

2  = X  (i^yp-). 


and 


Then  in     ', 


and 


and 


and      -,^^^ 


...a»—    and 

is  common. 


but 


and  .*. 


^    =   ^  (B.  i.pr.  8.); 

^    ^^^    a  right  angle  (B.  3.  pr.  18.), 

^r     :=    ^_J|    a  right  angle, 
■^    is  a  tangent  to  the  circle  (B.  3.  pr.  16.' 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  IV. 


DEFINITIONS. 

I. 

RECTILINEAR  figure  is 
faid  to  be  infcribed  in  another, 
when  all  the  angular  points 
of  the  infcribed  figure  are  on 

the  fides  of  the  figure  in  which  it  is  faid 

to  be  infcribed. 


II. 

A  FIGURE  is  faid  to  be  defcribed  about  another  figure,  when 
all  the  fides  of  the  circumfcribed  figure  pafs  through  the 
angular  points  of  the  other  figure. 


III. 

A  RECTILINEAR  figure  is  faid  to  be 
infcribed  in  a  circle,  when  the  vertex 
of  each  angle  of  the  figure  is  in  the 
circumference  of  the  circle. 


IV. 

A  RECTILINEAR  figure  is  faid  to  be  cir- 
cumfcribed about  a  circle,  when  each  of 
its  fides  is  a  tangent  to  the  circle. 


124  BOOK  IF.    DEFINITIONS. 


V. 


A  CIRCLE  is  faid  to  be  tnfcribed  in 
a  redlilinear  figure,  when  each  fide 
of  the  figure  is  a  tangent  to  the 
circle. 


VI. 

A  CIRCLE  is  faid  to  be  circum- 
fcribed  about  a  redtihnear  figure, 
when  the  circumference  pafles 
through  the  vertex  of  each 
angle  of  the  figure. 


y 


is  circumfcribed. 


VII. 

A  STRAIGHT  line  is  faid  to  be  tnfcribed  in 

a  circle,  when  its  extremities  are  in  the  \ 

circumference. 


The  Fourth  Book  of  the  Elements  is  devoted  to  the  folution  of  J 

problems t  chiefly  relating  to  the  infcription  and  circumfcrip- 
tion  of  regular  polygons  and  circles. 

A  regular  polygon  is  one  whofe  angles  and  fides  are  equal. 


BOOK  IF.    PROP.  I.    PROP. 


125 


N  a  given  circle 


O 


to  place  ajlraight  line, 
equal  to  agivenjlraight  line  (  ), 

not  greater  than  the  diameter  of  the 
circle. 


Draw 


,  the  diameter  of 


and  if  ..-....^— .    ^:z 


', then 


the  problem  is  folved. 


But  if 


be  not  equal  to 


(hyp-) ; 


make 


(B.  I.  pr.  3.)  with 
as  radius. 


defcribe     I  ),  cutting     f  |,  and 

draw  ^  which  is  the  line  required. 


For 


(B.  I.  def.  15.  confl.) 


Q.  E.  D. 


126 


BOOK  IF.    PROP.  II.    PROP. 


N  a  given  circle 


O 


to    m- 


Jcribe  a  triangle  equiangular 
to  a  given  triangle. 


To  any  point  of  the  given  circle  draw 


,  a  tangent 


(B.  3.  pr.  17.) ;   and  at  the  point  of  contadt 
make    ^^^    — -     ^^   (B.  i.  pr.  23.) 


and  in  like  manner 
draw 


Ik 


and 


Becaufe 
and 


J^     =    ^    (conft.) 
Jg^     =  ^^  (B.  3.  pr.  32.) 
.*.     ^^   =  ^U  ;  alfo 

V^     =:    ^r       ^°^  ^^  i-3xtit  reafon. 

,\^  =   ^    (B.  i.pr.  32.), 

and  therefore  the  triangle  infcribed  in  the  circle  is  equi- 
angular to  the  given  one. 

Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  IF.   PROP.  III.    PROB. 


127 


BOUT    a  given 
circle 


O 


to 


circumfcribe  a  triangle  equi- 
angular to  a  given  triangle. 


Produce  any  fide 


,  of  the  given  triangle  both 


ways  ;  from  the  centre  of  the  given  circle  draw 
any  radius. 


Make  ^ft   = 


^ 


and 


(B.  I.  pr.  23.) 


r=% 


At  the  extremities  of  the  three  radii,  draw 


and    .-.-...--,  tangents  to  the 
given  circle.    (B.  3.  pr.  17.) 


Zi 


The  four  angles  of    >^Wi ^B  ,  taken  together,  are 

equal  to  four  right  angles.    (B.  i.  pr.  32.) 


128  BOOK  IF.    PROP.  III.    PROB. 


but  ^B   ^"d   ^^^    ^^^  I'ight  angles  (confl.) 


two  right  angles 

but     ^H^       ^    La^^^M^     (B'   ^'  P''-    ^3-) 

and  =     ^^    (conft.) 


and   ,*, 

In  the  fame  manner  it  can  be  demonftrated  that 


<^=^, 


4  =  4 


(B.  i.pr.  32.) 

and  therefore  the  triangle  circumfcribed  about  the  given 
circle  is  equiangular  to  the  given  triangle. 

Q,  E.  D. 


i 


BOOK  IF.     PROP.  IV.    PROB. 


129 


fcribe  a  circle. 


Bifeft 


^     and    ^V. 


(B.  i.pr.  9.)   by 
and    "— ^^ 


from  the  point  where  thefe  lines 
meet    draw    -•■■— , 
and    »•••■    refpedlively     per- 
pendicular to    — BMI^HiB  , 


In 


and 


/ 


and 


> 


A  4 


and 


common,  ,*,   «••••••.•.  ^^  .■■■...•.».    (B.  i.  pr.  4and  26.) 

In  like  manner,  it  may  be  fhown  alfo 


that 


hence  with  any  one  of  thefe  lines  as  radius,  defcribe 

and  it  will  pafs  through  the  extremities  of  the 


o 


other  two ;  and  the  fides  of  the  given  triangle,  being  per- 
pendicular to  the  three  radii  at  their  extremities,  touch  the 
circle  (B.  3.  pr.  16.),  which  is  therefore  infcribed  in  the 


given  circle. 


Q.  E.  D. 


130 


BOOK  IV.    PROP.  V.    PROB. 


O  defer ibe  a  circle  about  a  given  triangle. 


■"  and 


--- (B.  I.  pr.  10.) 

From  the  points  of  bifedlion  draw    — 
■•■■•■■•••     J_    -^■~— ^    and  ' 


and 


refpec- 


tively  (B.  i.  pr.  11.),   and  from  their  point  of 
concourfe  draw  i^--^^^,  «••■-——  and  

and  defcribe  a  circle  with  any  one  of  them,  and 
it  will  be  the  circle  required. 


In 


(conft.). 


-    common, 

^  (conft.), 

(B.  I.  pr.  4.). 


■■■^•■■aiaKa 


In  like  manner  it  may  be  fhown  that 


,  ,     ■■■■««■■■■  ^^    ^■^■^^^^^^"    m^^^  "^^^^  \    and 

therefore  a  circle  defcribed  from  the  concourfe  of 
thefe  three  lines  with  any  one  of  them  as  a  radius 
will  circumfcribe  the  given  triangle. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  IF.     PROP.  FI.    PROB.  131 


O 


N  a  given  circle  f  j  /<? 

infcribe  a  fquare. 


Draw  the   two  diameters   of  the 
circle  _L  to  each  other,  and  draw 


o 


is  a  fquare. 


f 


For,  iince    ^^^^    and   ^^^    are,  each  of  them,  in 


a  femicirclc,  they  are  right  angles  (B.  3.  pr.  31), 
/.    — ^    11  (B.  i.pr.  28): 


and  in  like  manner 


And  becaufe    mg    ^    |^^  (confl.),  and 

•••■•■■SM«   """   >■■>■■■■■■■   ""•  •••»»•■•■••=  f  B.  I .  def.  I  c). 

.*.    —    =   —> —    (B.  I.  pr.  4); 

and  fmce  the  adjacent  fides  and  angles  of  the  parallelo- 

gram  ^         X  are  equal,  they  are  all  equal  (B.  i.  pr.  34) ; 


o 


and    /,    -^        ^  ,  infcribed  in  the   given  circle,  is  a 
fquare.  Q.  E.  D. 


132 


BOOK  IF.    PROP.  VIL    PROP. 


BOUT   a    given    circle 
I  i   ^^  circumfcribe 


a  fquare. 


Draw  two  diameters  of  the  given 
circle  perpendicular  to  each  other, 
and  through  their  extremities  draw 


1  9  9 

tangents  to  the  circle ; 


and         — 


and 


D 


is  a  fquare. 


—   /       I    a  right  angle,  (B.  3.  pr.  18.) 


alfo 
-     II 


(conft.), 
5   in  the  fame  manner  it  can 


be   demonftrated  that 
that  — ^^    and   - 


•  •■*••«  ■■  !■ 


and  alfo 


,»,   I  I   is  a  parallelogram,  and 


becaufe 

they  are  all  right  angles  (B.  i.  pr.  34) 
it  is  alfo  evident  that  — --^  ,  —— ^.^  , 
and     -i^— ^     are  equal. 


D 


is  a  fquare. 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  IV.    PROP.  Fill.    PROB. 


133 


O    infcribe  a  circle  in  a 
given  fquare. 


Make 
and 
draw 


and   — —  II     .. 

(B.  I.  pr.  31.) 


and  fince 


is  a  parallelogram ; 


is  equilateral   (B.  i.  pr.  34.) 


In  like  manner,  it  can  be  fhown  that 


are  equilateral  parallelograms ; 


and  therefore  if  a  circle  be  defcribed  from  the  concourfe 
oi  thefe  lines  with  any  one  of  them  as  radius,  it  will  be 
infcribed  in  the  given  fquare.    (B.  3.  pr.  16.) 

CLE.  D. 


134 


BOOK  IF.    PROP.  IX.    PROB. 


O  defcribe  a  circle  about  a 
given  fquare 


3 


Draw  the  diagonals  ^— — .-. 
and  "— ■    interfedting  each 

other ;  then, 


becaufe 


"^-^Ik 


have 


their  fides  equal,  and  the  bafe 
■  ■»«*»■•    comnion  to  both, 


or 


r 


^ 


(B.  i.pr.  8), 


is  bifedled  :  in  like  manner  it  can  be  (hown 


that 


is  bifedted ; 


hence 


^k      rr    ^^   their  halves. 


•.  =  ;  (B.  I.  pr.  6.) 

and  in  like  manner  it  can  be  proved  that 


If  from  the  confluence  of  thefe  lines  with  any  one  of 

them  as  radius,  a  circle  be  defcribed,  it  will  circumfcrihe 

the  given  fquare. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  IV.    PROP.  X.    PROP. 


'35 


O  conftruSl  an  ifofceles 
triangle,  in  which  each  of 
the  angles  at  the  bafejliail 
he  double  of  the   vertical 


angle. 


Take  any  fliaiwht  line   ^— 
and  divide  it  fo  that 

X = 

(B.  2.  pr.  I  I.) 
With   —I""   as  radius,  defcribe 


o 


in  it  from  the  extremity  of  the  radius, 
(B.  4.  pr.  i) ;    draw 


Then 


\ 


and  place 


\    is  the  required  triangle. 


For,  draw 


and  defcribe 


O 


Since 


about         ^ I    (B.  4.  pr.  ^.) 

X 


•  ■■■■■     X    "■ 


•—  is  a  tangent  to     (  )    (B.  3.  pr.  37.) 

.%   m    =    ^   (B.  3.  pr.  32), 


1 36  BOOK  IV.    PROP.  X.    PROB. 

add    ^F      to  each, 

•••   A  +  <  =  ^  +  ^; 

but    ▼      +     A    or    #       =z    A  (B.  I.  pr.  5)  : 
fince    -—"m-m   ^  ■"»»    (B.  I.  pr.  5.) 

confequently    jH[^   ^    ^Xi    ^    ^f     ^    JH^ 
(B.  I.  pr.  32.) 

.'.    —  =    (B.  i.pr.  6.) 

.•.    — ^—  =z   — — ^—   ^    .^_.  (conft.) 

.-.     -^    =    W     (B.  I.pr.  5.) 

.-.  A=^  =  A  =  ^  + 

=:    twice     y^t  5  and  confequently  each  angle  at 
the  bafe  is  double  of  the  vertical  angle. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  IV.    PROP.  XL    PROB. 


137 


N  a  given  circ/e 


o 


to   infcribe  an  equilateral  and  equi- 
angular pentagon. 

Conftrudl  an  ifofceles  triangle,  in 
which  each  of  the  angles  at  the  bafe 
fhall  be  double  of  the  angle  at  the 
vertex,   and    infcribe   in    the   given 


▲ 


circle  a  triangle    ^^    equiangular  to  it ;    (B.  4.  pr.  2.) 
^    and  ^\    (B.  i.pr.9.) 


Bifedl 


draw 


and 


Becaufe  each  of  the  angles 


A.^.A 


^ 


and        \\    are  equal, 
the  arcs  upon  which  they  ftand  are  equal,   (B.  3.  pr.  26.) 


and   .*. 


and 


....■■».  which  fubtend  thefe  arcs  are  equal  (B.3.pr.  29.) 
and  ,*,  the  pentagon  is  equilateral,  it  is  alfo  equiangular, 
as  each  of  its  angles  ftand  upon  equal  arcs.   (B.  3.  pr.  27). 

Q^E.  D. 


138 


BOOK  IV.    PROP.  XII.     PROP. 


O  defcribe  an  equilateral 
and  equiangular  penta- 
gon about  a  given  circle 


O- 


Draw  five  tangents  through  the 
vertices  of  the  angles  of  any  regular 
pentagon    infcribed    in    the    given 


circle 


o 


(B.  3.  pr.  17). 

Thefe  five  tangents  will  form  the  required  pentagon. 


Draw 


'  1:™ 


In 


and 


■  ^■•■■■■■B 


(B.  i.pr.47), 

and  ■    common  ; 


.-.7  = 


<- 


twice 


and     ▼    =    .4.   (B.  i.pr.  8.) 

,  and    ^^1    =r   twice     ^ 
In  the  fame  manner  it  can  be  demonilrated  that 

^^/    =:    twice    ^^  ,    and   ^r    ^   t^vice    ^; 

but     ^    ^    "     B.  3.pr.  27), 


BOOK  IV.     PROP.  XII.    PROB.  139 

their  halves  =    j^  ,   alfo    £ I    ^    I     \  9  and 

-■■■-■■■»    common ; 

and   «-i-iaMaiii.     ^      ...HMMiB, 

,•,  •■^-■»  .— ^K   ^    twice  — ^—  5 

In  the  fame  manner  it  can  be  demonftrated 

that    1^^^---—    ^    twice    ■-■^-•, 

but    — —   =  — — • 

In  the  fame  manner  it  can  be  demonftrated  that  the 
other  fides  are  equal,  and  therefore  the  pentagon  is  equi- 
lateral, it  is  alfo  equiangular,  for 

^^    ^   twice    1^^    and    \^^   =  twice    j^^ , 


and  therefore 

•   mKkl    —     uflB  9    1"  the  fame  manner  it  can  be 
demon  ftrated  that  the  other  angles  of  the  defcribed 
pentagon  are  equal. 

QE.  D 


140 


BOOK  IF.   PROP.  XIII.    PROP. 


Draw 


Becaufe 
and 


O  infcribe  a  circle  in  a 
given  equiangular  and 
equilateral  pentagon. 


^^^  «■/     ^^  ^  given  equiangular 

and  equilateral  pentagon  ;    it  is  re- 
quired to  infcribe  a  circle  in  it. 


Make 


^=^,andi|^=^ 
(B.  i.pr.  9.) 


=    - ,r=A, 

common  to  the  two  triangles 


&c. 


/ 


and       >A     ...,.lk    ; 

..  and  ^r  ^    J|^  (B.  i.  pr.  4.) 


And  becaufe     ^^  ^ 


,*,  r=  twice 


4 


twice 


is  bifedled  by 


In  like  manner  it  may  be  demonftrated  that 


^ 


IS 


«••• "j  and    that   the  remaining  angle  of 


bifedled  by 

the  polygon  is  bifedled  in  a  fimilar  manner 


BOOK  IV.   PROP.  XIII.    PROB.  141 

Draw  ^i— -i^  ,  -....-..  ,  6cc.  perpendicular  to  the 
fides  of  the  pentagon. 


Then  in  the  two  triangles    ^^        and 


A 


we  have    ^^    z=    ^^^,(conft.),    ^^^^i^    common, 
and    ^V    :^    JIh    =    a  right  angle ; 


,     (B.  I.  pr.  26.) 


In  the  fame  way  it  may  be  fhown  that  the  five  perpen- 
diculars on  the  fides  of  the  pentagon  are  equal  to  one 
another. 


o 


Defcribe  X^  ^  with  any  one  of  the  perpendicu- 
lars as  radius,  and  it  will  be  the  infcribed  circle  required. 
For  if  it  does  not  touch  the  fides  of  the  pentagon,  but  cut 
them,  then  a  line  drawn  from  the  extremity  at  right  angles 
to  the  diameter  of  a  circle  will  fall  within  the  circle,  which 
has  been  fhown  to  be  abfurd.     (B.  3.  pr.  16.) 

f^E.  D. 


14* 


BOOK  IV,    PROP.  Xn\    PROB. 


pO  dcfirihc  j  r.-TiV  chcn:  s 


grom  egh:.s: 


'sJ  ^nd  csiii 


oik    and     ^^ 


Bilect      ^JHk    and 
bT   ••••••»»»«»   and   ..-•......  ,   and 

^om  the  point  of  fedion,  draw 

._^B ,    >••»»•  ,   and   ^^^^ . 


(B.  i.pr.6): 


I"  like  manner  it  mar  be  proved  that 
■    ^  ^iB^^M    ^   ^^— — ,    and 
therefore   -•••••••    ^    — ^—    ^   ••m>»...w. 


Therefore  if  a  circle  be  defcribed  from  the  point  where 
thefe  five  lines  meet,  with  any  one  of  tfaem 

as  a  radius,  it  will  circumicribe 

the  given  pcntagoo. 

Q  E-  D. 


BOOK  W.    PROP.  XV.    PROB. 

O  infcribe  an  equilateral  and  equian- 
gular   hexagon    in   a     gircen   circle 


H3 


O- 


From  any  point  in  the  circumference  of 
the    given   circle    defcribe    ^  J    palling 


o 


through  its  centre,  and  draw  the  diameters 


and 


draw 


...._»■_  J  .-..-..-^  .........J  &c.  and  the 

required  hexagon  is  inicribed  in  the   given 
circle. 


Since 


of  the  circles. 


palles  through  the  centres 


and 


are  equilateral 


4  =  ^ 


triangles,  hence   ^^   ^   ^^  ^  one-third  of  two  right 


angles;    i^B.  i.  pr.  32)   but 

(B.  i.pr.  13); 


=  m 


^    one-third  of 


£Di 


(B.  I.  pr.  32%  and  the  angles  vertically  oppoiite  re  :::ei"e 
are  all  equal  to  one  another  (B.  i.  pr.  i  ;\  and  iland  on 
equal  arches  (B.  3.  pr.  26),  which  are  fubtended  by  equal 
chords  (B.  3.  pr.  29) ;  and  fince  each  of  the  angles  of  the 
hexagon  is  double  of  the  angle  of  an  equilateral  triangle, 
it  is  alio  equiangular.  O    ^    F) 


'44 


BOOK  IV.    PROP.  XVI.    PROP. 


O  infcribe  an  equilateral  and 
equiangular  quindecagon  in 
a  given  circle. 


and 


be 


the  fides  of  an  equilateral  pentagon 
infcribed  in  the  given  circle,  and 
««»-—  the  fide  of  an  inscribed  equi- 
lateral triangle. 


The  arc  fubtended  by 
.  and  __ 


_6_ 
I  4 


of  the  whole 
circumference. 


The  arc  fubtended  by  1 


_5_ 
1  i 


Their  difference  =:  tV 


,'.  the  arc  fubtended  by 
the  whole  circumference. 


of  the  whole 
circumference. 


zz.    tV  difference  of 


Hence  if  firaight  lines  equal  to  ..-«.—■«  be  placed  in  the 
circle  (B.  4.  pr.  i),  an  equilateral  and  equiangular  quin- 
decagon will  be  thus  infcribed  in  the  circle. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  V. 


DEFINITIONS. 


I. 


LESS  magnitude  is  faid  to  be  an  aliquot  part  or 
fubmultiple  of  a  greater  magnitude,  when  the 
lefs  meafures  the  greater ;   that  is,  when  the 


'^  lefs  is  contained  a  certain  number  of  times  ex- 


adlly  in  the  greater. 


II. 


A  GREATER  magnitude  is  faid  to  be  a  multiple  of  a  lefs, 
when  the  greater  is  meafured  by  the  lefs ;  that  is,  when 
the  greater  contains  the  lefs  a  certain  number  of  times 
exadlly. 

III. 

Ratio  is  the  relation  which  one  quantity  bears  to  another 
of  the  fame  kind,  with  refpedl  to  magnitude. 


IV. 

Magnitudes  are  faid  to  have  a  ratio  to  one  another,  when 
they  are  of  the  fame  kind ;  and  the  one  which  is  not  the 
greater  can  be  multiplied  fo  as  to  exceed  the  other. 

TAe  of  her  definitions  will  be  given  throughout  the  book 
where  their  aid  is  Jirjl  required. 
u 


146 


AXIOMS. 


QUIMULTIPLES  or  equifubmultiples  of  the 
fame,  or  of  equal  magnitudes,  are  equal. 

If  A  =  B,  then 
twice  A  ^  twice  B,  that  is, 
2  A  =  2  B; 
3Az=3B; 
4  A  =  4B; 
&c.  &c. 
and  i  of  A  =  i  of  B  ; 
i  of  A  =  i  of  B  ; 
&c.  &c. 

II. 

A  MULTIPLE  of  a  greater  magnitude  is  greater  than  the  fame 
multiple  of  a  lefs. 

Let  A  C  B,  then 

2  AC  2  B; 

3  ACZ3B; 

4  AIZ4B; 

&c.  &c. 

III. 

That  magnitude,  of  which  a  multiple  is  greater  than  the 
fame  multiple  of  another,  is  greater  than  the  other. 

Let  2  A  C  2  B,  then 

ACB; 
or,  let  3  A  C  3  B,  then 

ACB; 
or,  let  w  A  CZ  m  B,  then 

ACB. 


\ 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  I.     THEOR. 


H7 


F  any  number  of  magnitudes  be  equimultiples  of  as 

many  others,  each  of  each :  what  multiple  soever 

any  one  of  the  firjl  is  of  its  part,  the  fame  multiple 

jhall  of  the  fir  ft  magnitudes  taken  together  be  of  all 

the  others  taken  together. 

LetQQQQQ   be  the  fame  multiple  of  Q, 
that   Pip^^^  isof  ^. 
that    OOOQO  ^s  of  Q. 


Then  is  evident  that 

• QQQQQ 


OOOOQ 


fQ 


is  the  fame  multiple  of  < 


Q 


which  that  QQQQQ  is  of  Q  ; 
becaufe  there  are  as  many  magnitudes 


QQQQQ 1 


m   <! 


.QOOQOJ 


Q 
Q 


as  there  are  in  QQQQQ      :=     Q. 

The  fame  demonftration  holds  in  any  number  of  mag- 
nitudes, which  has  here  been  applied  to  three. 


,*,  If  any  number  of  magnitudes,  &c. 


148  BOOK  r.    PROP.  11.    THEOR. 


|F  the  fir  ft  magnitude  be  the  fame  multiple  of  the 
fecondthat  the  third  is  of  the  fourth,  and  the  fifth 
the  fame  multiple  of  the  fecond  that  the  fixth  is  oj 
the  fourth,  then  fiall  the  firfi,  together  with  the 

fifth,  be  the  fame  multiple  of  the  fecond  that  the  third,  together 

•with  the  fixth,  is  of  the  fourth. 

Let  ^01 9,  the  firil,  be  the  fame  muhiple  of  ^, 
the  fecond,  that  OO  0>  ^'^^  third,  is  of  <^,  the  fourth ; 
and  let  9  0  0  0,  the  fifth,  be  the  fame  multiple  of  * , 
the  fecond,  that  OOOOj  ^^^  fixth,  is  of  <2>,  the 
fourth. 

Then  it  is  evident,  that  \  .^  ,^.  ,^.  .^  '  ,  the  firfl  and 
fifth  together,  is  the  fame  multiple  of  ,  the  fecond, 
that  \    !r!r^^    k  the  third  and  fixth  together,  is  of 

looooj 

the  fame  multiple  of  <2>)  the  fourth ;  becaufe  there  are  as 

f    #••     1 
many  magnitudes  i"  ]  ^^^^  ^  3P    ^s  there  are 


•  f  000  \  _  ^ 


,*,  If  the  firfl:  magnitude,  &c. 


BOOK  V.   PROP.  III.    THEOR. 


149 


F  thefirjl  of  four  magnitudes  be  the  fame  multiple 
of  the  fecond  that  the  third  is  of  the  fourth,  and 
if  any  equimultiples  whatever  of  the  firjl  and  third 
be  taken,  thofe  Jliall  be  equimultiples  ;  one  of  the 


fecond,  and  the  other  of  the  fourth. 


The  First. 


The  Second. 


Let  \        "     |-  be  the  iame  multiple  of 

I  ! 

The  Third.  The  Fourth. 

which   j  T  T  [  is  of  A  ; 


take   <;^   S  S  S  S  >  the  fame  multiple  of  < 


which   \  J  3  ?  A 

[♦♦♦♦ 


>  is  of  \ 


♦♦ 


that  ^ 


Then  it  is  evident, 

Tlie  Second. 

is  the  fame  multiple  of  | 


150 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  III.     THEOR. 


which  i 


♦♦♦♦ 


♦  ♦♦♦ 

♦  ♦♦♦ 


The  Fourth. 

-  is  of  ^  ; 


J 


becaufe  < 


>  contains 


>  contains 


♦♦♦♦' 

♦♦♦♦ 

♦♦♦♦ 


as  many  times  as 


;-  contains  ■!  T^  T^  !>  contains   ^ 


♦♦ 


The  fame  realbning  is  applicable  in  all  cafes. 


.*.  If  the  firft  four,  &c. 


BOOK  V.    DEFINITION  V. 


'51 


DEFINITION   V. 

Four  magnitudes,  ^^  01  ^  ^  >  ^j  are  faid  to  be  propor- 
tionals when  every  equimultiple  of  the  firft  and  third  be 
taken,  and  every  equimultiple  of  the  fecond  and  fourth,  as. 


of  the  firfl 


&c. 

of  the  fecond 


of  the  third      ^  ^ 


♦  ♦♦♦ 
♦  ♦♦♦♦ 

♦♦♦♦♦♦ 

&c. 
of  the  fourtli 


&c.  &c. 

Then  taking  every  pair  of  equimultiples  of  the  firft  and 
third,  and  every  pair  of  equimultiples  of  the  fecond  and 
fourth, 

' —     =or^«« 

=  or  31 

or  ^ 

=  or  33 

=  or  — 1 


r 


\^<mm  cz,  = 


L 


^♦4    C.  =  °r 

♦  ♦    C.  =  or 

then  will   - 

♦  ♦    C,  =  or 

tt    C.  =  or 

^♦^    C.  =  or 

152 


BOOK  F.    DEFINITION  V. 


That  is,  if  twice  the  firfl  be  greater,  equal,  or  lefs  than 
twice  the  fecond,  twice  the  third  will  be  greater,  equal,  or 
lefs  than  twice  the  fourth  ;  or,  if  twice  the  firfl  be  greater, 
equal,  or  lefs  than  three  times  the  fecond,  twice  the  third 
will  be  greater,  equal,  or  lefs  than  three  times  the  fourth, 
and  so  on,  as  above  expreffed. 


If 


or 
or 
or 
or 
or 


then 
will 


&c. 

'♦♦♦ 
♦♦♦ 
♦♦♦ 

♦  ♦♦ 

♦  ♦♦ 

&c. 


c  = 


6cc. 


or  Z] 

or  31 

or  ^ 

or  Z] 

or  ^ 


&c. 


In  other  terms,  if  three  times  the  firft  be  greater,  equal, 
or  lefs  than  twice  the  fecond,  three  times  the  third  will  be 
greater,  equal,  or  lefs  than  twice  the  fourth ;  or,  if  three 
times  the  firft  be  greater,  equal,  or  lefs  than  three  times  the 
fecond,  then  will  three  times  the  third  be  greater,  equal,  or 
lefs  than  three  times  the  fourth ;  or  if  three  times  the  firft 
be  greater,  equal,  or  lefs  than  four  times  the  fecond,  then 
will  three  times  the  third  be  greater,  equal,  or  lefs  than  four 
times  the  fourth,  and  so  on.     Again, 


BOOK  V.    DEFINITION  V. 


^Sl 


If  < 


Sec. 


then 
will 


♦  ♦♦♦ 

♦  ♦♦♦ 


^  or  ^ 

=  or  ^ 

=  or  Zl 

=:  or  ID 

=  or  ID 

=  or  Zl 

=  or  Zl 

=  or  Z] 

=  or  Zl 

=  or  Zl 


&c. 


&c. 


&;c. 


And  so  on,  with  any  other  equimultiples  of  the  four 
magnitudes,  taken  in  the  fame  manner. 

Euclid  exprefles  this  definition  as  follows : — 

The  firft  of  four  magnitudes  is  faid  to  have  the  fame 
ratio  to  the  fecond,  which  the  third  has  to  the  fourth, 
when  any  equimultiples  whatfoever  of  the  firft  and  third 
being  taken,  and  any  equimultiples  whatfoever  of  the 
fecond  and  fourth  ;  if  the  multiple  of  the  firft  be  lefs  than 
that  of  the  fecond,  the  multiple  of  the  third  is  alfo  lefs  than 
that  of  the  fourth  ;  or,  it  the  multiple  of  the  firft  be  equal 
to  that  of  the  fecond,  the  multiple  of  the  third  is  alfo  equal 
to  that  of  the  fourth ;  or,  ii  the  multiple  of  the  firft  be 
greater  than  that  of  the  fecond,  the  multiple  of  the  third 
is  alfo  greater  than  that  of  the  fourth. 

In  future  we  ftiall  exprefs  this  definition  generally,  thus  : 

If  M  #  C  =  or  Zl  ''^        , 
when  M  ^    C  =  or  313  ;;;  ^ 


154  BOOK  V.    DEFINITION  F. 

Then  we  infer  that  0  ,  the  firft,  lias  the  lame  ratio 
to  ^ ,  the  fecond,  which  ^ ,  the  third,  has  to  ^  the 
fourth  :   exprelTed  in  the  fucceeding  demonftrations  thus  : 

#  :ii   ::  4  :  V; 

or  thus,  0  :  It   =  ^  •  V  7 

or  thus,  —  ^  =■  :  and  is  read, 

"  as  0  is  to        ,  so  is  ^  to  ^. 

And  if  #  :  "      : :  ^   :  ip  we  fhall  infer  if 

M  0  C5  ^=  or  ^  w     , ,  ,  then  will 

M  ^   C  =  or  13  w  ^. 

That  is,  if  the  firfl;  be  to  the  fecond,  as  the  third  is  to  the 
fourth  ;  then  if  M  times  the  firft  be  greater  than,  equal  to, 
or  lefs  than  m  times  the  fecond,  then  (hall  M  times  the 
third  be  greater  than,  equal  to,  or  lefs  than  m  times  the 
fourth,  in  which  M  and  m  are  not  to  be  confidered  parti- 
cular multiples,  but  every  pair  of  multiples  whatever; 
nor  are  fuch  marks  as  0,  ^,  ,  &c.  to  be  confidered 
any  more  than  reprefentatives  of  geometrical  magnitudes. 

The  ftudent  fhould  thoroughly  underftand  this  definition 
before  proceeding  further. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  IF.    THEOR. 


^SS 


F  the  firjl  of  four  magnitudes  have  the  fame  ratio  to 
the  fecond,  which  the  third  has  to  the  fourth,  then 
any  equimultiples  whatever  of  the  frji  and  third 
shall  have  the  fame  ratio  to  any  equimultiples  of 
the  fecond  and  fourth  ;  viz.,  the  equimultiple  of  the  firji  Jliall 
have  the  fame  ratio  to  that  of  the  fecond,  which  the  equi- 
multiple of  the  third  has  to  that  of  the  fourth. 


m 


Let      :  ■  ::^  :^,  then3      :2|::3^:2^, 

every  equimultiple  of  3  and  3  ^  are  equimultiples  of 
^  and  ^ ,  and  every  equimultiple  of  2  ^  and  2  ^ ,  are 
equimultiples  of  |  and  ^    (B.  5,  pr.  3.) 

That  is,  M  times  3  '^  and  M  times  3  ^  are  equimulti- 
ples of  and  ^ ,  and  ;;z  times  2  |  and  w  2  1^  are  equi- 
multiples of  2   H  and  2  ^  ;   but  •  H  •  •   ^   •  V 

(hyp);    .*.   if  M    3  C   =,    or    ;^  »?  2    |||,   then 

M  3    ^    C   r=,  or  Z]  «  2  ip   (def.  5.) 

and  therefore  3    ^:2||::3^:2^  (def.  5.) 

The  fame  reafoning  holds  good  if  any  other  equimul- 
tiple of  the  firft  and  third  be  taken,  any  other  equimultiple 
of  the  fecond  and  fourth. 

,*.  If  the  firfl:  four  magnitudes,  &c. 


156 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  V.    THEOR. 


F  one  magnitude  be  the  fame  multiple  of  another, 
which  a  magnitude  taken  from  thefirfl  is  of  a  mag- 
nitude taken  from  the  other,  the  remainder  Jhall  be 
the  fame  multiple  of  the  remainder,  that  the  whole 


is  of  the  whole. 


Q 

LetQQ 
O 


=  M'^ 


and 


=  M-,, 


o 

C^<^  minus         =  M'       minus  M'  «> 

D 

.-.      <>     =M'(Jminus.), 


and  /.  ^     =  M'  A. 


/,  If  one  magnitude,  Sec. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  VI.     THEOR.  157 


F  two  magnitudes  be  equimultiples  of  two  others, 
and  if  equimultiples  of  thefe  be  taken  from  the  fir Ji 
two,  the  remainders  are  either  equal  to  thefe  others, 
or  equimultiples  of  them. 


Q 

Let    :yQ  =  M'  ■  ;  and  QQ  =  M'  a  ; 

o 

Q 

then  00   minus  ni  m  ::^ 

o 

M'  ■  minus  /w'  «  =  (M'  minus  m')  b, 

and  00  minus  m'  k  :=  M'  a  minus  /«'  4  := 
(M'  minus  m')  k  . 

Hence,  (M'  minus  ;«')  m  and  (M'  minus  tn')  k  are  equi- 
multiples of  K  and  k  ,  and  equal  to  *  and  a  9 
when  M'  minus  m'  ':^i  i. 

.'.   If  two  magnitudes  be  equimultiples,  &c. 


158 


BOOK  F.    PROP.  A.    THEOR. 


F  the  firjl  of  t/ie  four  magnitudes  has  the  fame  ratio 
to  the  fecond  which  the  third  has  to  the  fourth, 
then  if  the  firjl  be  greater  than  the  fecond,  the 
third  is  alfo  greater  than  the  fourth  ;  and  f  equal, 
equal ;   if  lefs,  lefs. 

Let   ^  :  H  :  r  ip  :  ^    ;  therefore,  by  the  fifth  defini- 
tion, if  %%  d    ■■,  then  will  ^^    C  #4   ; 
but  if  #   CZ   ■,  then  ##    [Z   ■■ 
and  ^fp   [= 
and  .*.  ^  C   ;►  . 

Similarly,  if  ^  ^,  or  ^  J,  then  will  ^  z^, 
or  ^        . 

.'.   If  the  firfl  of  four,  &c. 


DEFINITION   XIV. 

Geometricians  make  ufe  of  the  technical  term  "  Inver- 
tendo,"  by  inverfion,  when  there  are  four  proportionals, 
and  it  is  inferred,  that  the  fecond  is  to  the  firfl  as  the  fourth 
to  the  third. 

Let  A  :  B  : :  C  :  O,  then,  by  "  invertendo"  it  is  inferred 
B  :  A  ::  I)  :  C. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  B.    THEOR. 


'50 


F  Jour  magnitudes  are  proportionals ,  they  are  pro- 
portionals alfo  when  taken  inverfely. 


Let  ^  :  O  : :  ■  :  ^  , 

then,  inverfely,  O  :  ^  1 1         :  ■ . 

If  M  ^  n  «  O?  then  M  ■  I]  w  ^ 
by  the  fifth  defimtion. 

Let  M  ^  ID  /w  Q,  that  is,  w  Q  CZ  M  ^ , 
.*.  M  B  lU  w       ,  or,  /«        CZ  M  ■  ; 
.*.  if  w  O  CZ  M  ^,  then  will  w         C  M  B 

In  the  fame  manner  it  may  be  (liown, 

that  if ;«  Q  :=  or  Z]  M  ^ , 

then  will  m         :=,  or  13  M  B  ; 

and  therefore,  by  the  fifth  definition,  we  infer 

that  O  :  ^  :  '^  :  H . 
.',  If  four  magnitudes,  &c. 


i6o 


BOOK  V.     PROP.  C.    THEOR. 


F  the  fiyji  be  the  fame  multiple  of  the  fecond,  or  the 
fame  part  of  it,  that  the  third  is  of  the  fourth  ; 

the  frjl   is  to  the  fecond,  as  the  third  is  to  the 

fourth. 


Let  ^  ^  t  the  firfl:,be  the  fame  multiple  of  ^,  the  fecond, 
that  7  J,  the  third,  is  of  ■,  the  fourth. 


♦  ♦.4 

♦  ♦ 


,m  0,  M  ?  ?,>«  A 


Then  _  _ 

takeMj  J 

■  ■ 
becaufe^S   is  the  fame  multiple  of  ^ 

that  J  J  is  of  4  (according  to  the  hypothcfis) ; 

and  ^M^    is  taken  the  fame  multiple  ofSS 
that  M  T  T  is  of   ?  T , 

,*,  (according  to  the  third  propolition), 
M  ^  _    is  the  fame  multiple  of  ^ 

that  M  T  T  is  of  4. 


BOOK  F.     PROP.  C.     THEOR.  i6i 


Therefore,  if  M    ^  ^  be  of  ^  a  greater  multiple  than 

;//  ^  is,  then  M    J  i  is  a  greater  multiple  of  ^  than 

w   A  is  ;   that  is,  if  M    S  S  ^^  greater  than  m  0,  then 

M  J  J  will  be  greater  than  m  ^ ;  in  the  fame  manner 

it  can  be  fliewn,  if  M    ^  ^  be  equal  m  ^^  then 

M   J  J  will  be  equal  m  A. 


And,  generally,  if  M  ^  ^  C  =z  or  ^  //; 
then  M  will  be  C  ^  or  ^  ;«  ^* 

,',  by  the  fifth  definition, 

■  ■_..♦♦.▲ 

■  ■•••♦♦•■• 

■  ■ 
Next,  let  0  be  the  fame  part  of  J  S 

that  itk  is  of  T  T- 
In  this  cafe  alfo  0  :  J  J  ::  (ffc  :  TT. 


For,  becaufe 

■■"*■"-""'  WW 


is  the  fame  part  of  ^  ^  that  ■  is  of  ^  ^ , 


1 62  BOOK  F.    PROP.  C.     THEOR. 

therefore  S  S  is  the  fame  muhiple  of 

that  ^  J  is  of  ^  . 

Therefore,  by  the  preceding  cafe, 

■  ■   .   A   ..  .  ^  . 

and    •     ^   •   ■■  ••   A   •  ^^ 

by  propofition  B. 
/.  If  the  firfl  be  the  fame  multiple,  &c. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  D.     THEOR. 


163 


\^  the  fir Jl  be  to  the  fecond  as  the  third  to  the  fourth, 
and  if  the  firfi  be  a  multiple,  or  a  part  of  the 
fecond;  the  third  is  the  fame  multiple,  or  the  fame 
part  of  the  fourth. 


and  firft,  let 


be  a  multiple   H; 


J  J  fhall  be  the  fame  multiple  of  ■. 

First.  Second.  Tliird.  Fourth. 

QQ      00 

Take  ^^  =r     ^ 
QQ 


Whatever  multiple 
take  ^^ 
then,  becaufe 


is  of  I 
the  fame  multiple  of  1 
•      ....♦♦ 


and  of  the  fecond  and  fourth,  we  have  taken  equimultiples, 

^nd   )f  Y  ,  therefore  (B.  c.  pr.  4), 
00 


i64  BOOK  F.    PROP.  D.    THEOR. 

'OCl"^^   .  ^^,  but  (conft.), 

and  y\y\  is  the  fame  multiple  of  ■ 
that  ^     is  of  U . 

Next,  let  B  :    ^  ^  •  ■  V  •  T  J  » 

and  alfo  H  a  part  of  -^^  ; 

then  ip  fhall  be  the  fame  part  of  J  J  , 

Inverfely  (B.  5.),  ^  '  ■  *=  ^  J    '   V' 
but  I  is  a  part  of    ^^  ; 
that  is,   ^  ^  is  a  multiple  of  |  ; 

,  by  the  preceding  cafe,  X  X   is  the  fame  multiple  of  ^ 
that  is,  ^  is  the  fame  part  of  X  X 
that  H  is  of 

,%  If  the  firft  be  to  the  fecond,  &c. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  VII.    THEOR 


165 


QUAL  magnitudes  have  the  fame  ratio  to  the  fame 
tnagnitiide,  and  the  fame  has  the  fame  ratio  to  equal 
magnitudes. 


Let  ^    =   ^   and  any  other  magnitude  ; 

then  0    :  =  ♦   •*  and  :  #    =   :       :  ^ , 

Becaufe  ^    ^  ^, 
.-.  M  #  =  M  ^  ; 

/,  if  M  0  C  :=  or  [3  /;/        ,  then 

M  ^  C  =  or  ;^  ;«       , 
and  .*.  %  :  c      =  ♦  :  ■   (B.  5.  def.  5). 

From  the  foregoing  reafoning  it  is  evident  that, 
i£  m  C  >  =  Of  ZD  M  0 ,  then 

wHC^orl^   M^ 
/.■:#=■:♦   (B.  5.  def.  5). 

,*.  Equal  magnitudes,  &c. 


i66  BOOK  F.    DEFINITION  VII. 


DEFINITION  VII. 

WiiKN  of  the  equimultiples  of  four  magnitudes  (taken  as  in 
tile  fifth  definition),  the  multiple  of  the  firft  is  greater  than 
tli:it  of  the  fecond,  but  the  multiple  of  the  third  is  not 
greater  than  the  multiple  of  the  fourth  ;  then  the  firft  is 
laid  to  have  to  the  fecond  a  greater  ratio  than  the  third 
magnitude  has  to  the  fourth  :  and,  on  the  contrary,  the 
third  is  faid  to  have  to  the  fourth  a  lefs  ratio  than  the  firft 
has  to  the  fecond. 

If,  among  the  equimultiples  of  four  magnitudes,  com- 
pared as  in  the  fifth  definition,  we  fhould  find 

•  #••#  [=■■■■,  but 
44^44  =  '"'  ^  W  IP  V.  or  if  we  mould 
rnul  .iny  particular  multiple  M  oi  the  firft  and  third,  and 
a  particular  multiple  m'  of  the  fecond  and  fourth,  fuch, 
that  M  times  the  firft  is  C  w'  times  the  fecond,  but  M' 
times  the  third  is  not  CZ  w  times  the  fourth,  i.e.  ^  or 
~~1  ";  times  the  fourth ;  then  the  firll  is  faid  to  have  to 
the  tiwnd  a  strcater  ratio  than  the  third  has  to  the  fourth; 
v>r  the  thial  has  to  the  fourth,  under  fuch  circumftances,  a 
lets  ratio  than  the  hrtl  has  to  the  feccaid :  although  feveral 
other  equimultiples  may  tend  to  ibow  that  the  four  mag- 
nitudes arc  piv>portionAls. 

This  det\i\itivM\  will  in  tuiure  be  exprdSbd  ti^is : — 

ItM    fP  C  rr  Q.  but  M   ■  =  -  Z3  'T  ♦  , 

then  P  :  ~  IZ  ■  :  ♦  . 

In  the  aK>\^  cv'  ;-    '  ;\   -tSoia*  M  «ad  af  aie  to  be 
wnikkitHi  jvftrtkn;.  cs,  at*  fike  dK  iMilli|ilr'  M 


BOOK  F.    DEFINITION  VII. 


167 


and  m  introduced  in  the  fifth  definition,  which  are  in  that 
definition  confidered  to  be  every  pair  of  multiples  that  can 
be  taken.  It  muft  alfo  be  here  obferved,  that  ip ,  U,  H  , 
and  the  like  fymbols  are  to  be  confidered  merely  the  repre- 
fentatives  of  geometrical  magnitudes. 

In  a  partial  arithmetical  way,  this  may  be  fet  forth  as 
follows  : 

Let  us  take  the  four  numbers,  8 ,  7,  j  c ,  and 


FirJi. 

Second. 

Third. 

Fourth. 

8 

7 

10 

Q 

lO 

14 

2C» 

24 

21 

30 

^7 

32 

28 

40 

36 

40 

35 

50 

45 

48 

42 

60 

54 

56 

49 

70 

63 

64 

56 

80 

72 

72 

63 

90 

8t 

80 

70 

lOD 

".'- 

88 

77 

no 

vy 

96 

84 

120 

108 

104 

9' 

'3° 

117 

T12 

98 

140 

126 

&c. 

&c. 

&c 

&c. 

Among  the  above  multiples  we  find  16  C  14  and  20 
r~  that  is,  twice  the  firft  is  greater  than  twice  the 

fecond,  and  twice  the  third  is  greater  than  twice  the  fourth ; 
and  16^21  and  20   "^  that  is,  twice  the  firil  is  lefs 

than  three  times  the  fecond,  and  twice  the  third  is  lefs  than 
three  times  the  fourth ;  and  among  the  fame  multiples  we 
can  find  -:  C  56  and  V  -   C  that  is,  9  times  the  firft 

is  greater  than  8  times  the  fecond,  and  9  times  the  third  is 
greater  than   8   times  the  fourth.     Many  other  equimul- 


1 68  BOOK  V.    DEFINITION  VII. 

tiples  might  be  selected,  which  would  tend  to  Ihow  that 
the  numbers  %,y,  \o,  were  proportionals,  but  they  are 
not,  for  we  can  find  a  multiple  of  the  firlt  ^  a  multiple  of 
the  fecond,  but  the  fame  multiple  of  the  third  that  has  been 
taken  of  the  firft  not  C  the  fame  multiple  of  the  fourth 
which  has  been  taken  of  the  fecond ;  for  inftance,  9  times 
the  hrll:  is  C  i  o  times  the  fecond,  but  9  times  the  third  is 
not  C  ^°  times  the  fourth,  that  is,  -:  C  70,  but  90 
not  CZ  or  8  times  the  firfl  we  find  C  9   times  the 

fecond,  but  8  times  the  third  is  not  greater  than  9  times 
the  fourth,  that  is,  O-i-C  63,  but  Sc  is  not  C  When 

any  fuch  multiples  as  thefe  can  be  found,  the  hrft  (3~)is 
faid  to  have  to  the  fecond  (7)  a  greater  ratio  than  the  third 
(10)  has  to  the  fourth  and  on  the  contrary  the  third 

(10)  is  faid  to  have  to  the  fourth  a  lefs  ratio  than  the 
firfl  (3)  has  to  the  fecond  (7). 


BOOK  r.    PROP.  Fill.     THEOR. 


109 


F  unequal  magnitudes  the  greater  has  a  greater 
ratio  to  the  fame  than  the  lefs  has  :  and  the  fame 
magnitude  has  a  greater  ?  atio  to  the  lefs  than  it 
has  to  the  greater. 


Let  m  and         be  two  unequal  magnitudes, 
and  ^  any  other. 

k 
We  fliall  firft  prove  that  H  which  is  the  greater  of  the 

two  unequal  magnitudes,  has  a  greater  ratio  to  0  than       , 

the  lefs,  has  to  ^  ^ 

that  is,  ■  :  0  [Z  ,   :  #  ; 

take  M'  l^/^'  #,  M'  ■,  and  tn   %  ; 

fuch,  that  M'  ▲  and  M'  H  fhall  be  each  C  #  ; 

alfo  take  ;;/  ^  the  leaft  multiple  of  ^ , 


which  will  make  m 


M' 


=  M' 


.*.  M'         is  not  CZ  f" 


butM' 


IS 


?n 


for. 


as  m'  A  is  the  firft  multiple  which  firft  becomes  C  M'^, 

than  (w  minus  I )  ^  or;;/  0  minus  ^  isnotCM' JU, 

and  ^  is  not  CI  M'  a, 

/.  ;;;'  0  minus  0  +  #  "^"^  be  Zl  M'  Jj  +  M'  A  ; 

A 

that  is,  ;;;'  %  mull  be  i;;^  M'  ■  ; 


.-.  M' 


IS 


tn 


',  but  it  has  been  fhown  above  that 


170  BOOK  F.    PROP.  Fill.    THEOR. 

M'  m  is  note  »?'  #  ,  therefore,  by  the  feventh  definition, 
m  has  to  0  a  greater  ratio  than  1:0. 

Next  we  fhall  prove  that  %   has  a  greater  ratio  to  ^  ,  the 
lefs,  than  it  has  to  j^ ,  the  greater ; 

o''#  :■  [=  •  :■• 

A 

Take  /;/  0,  M'  ■■,  m'  #,  and  M'  ||, 

the  fame  as  in  the  firll:  cafe,  fuch,  that 

M'  A  and  M'  jp  will  be  each  C  0 ,  and  m  %  the  leail 

multiple  of  ^  ,  which  firft  becomes  greater 

than  M'  H  =  M'  || . 

.'.  m  ^  minus  ^  is  notC  M'  ^, 

and  ^   is  not  CI  M'  A  ;  confequently 

m  %  minus  #  -}-  #  is  ZH  M'  g  -f  M'  a  ; 

▲ 

,*,  m'  ^  is  ID  M'  ■,  and  ,'.  by  the  feventh  definition, 

A 
^  has  to   a|  ^  greater  ratio  than  ^  has  to  ■ . 

,'.  Of  unequal  magnitudes,  &c. 

The  contrivance  employed  in  this  propofition  for  finding 
among  the  multiples  taken,  as  in  the  fifth  definition,  a  mul- 
tiple of  the  firfl  greater  than  the  multiple  of  the  fecond,  but 
the  fame  multiple  of  the  third  which  has  been  taken  of  the 
firft,  not  greater  than  the  fame  multiple  of  the  fourth  which 
has  been  taken  of  the  fecond,  may  be  illuftrated  numerically 
as  follows  : — 

The  number  9  has  a  greater  ratio  to  7  than  has  to  7  : 
that  is,  9  :  7  C      :  7 ;  or,  8  +  i  :  7  C      =  7- 


BOOKF.    PROP.  Fill.    THEOR,  171 

The  multiple  of  i ,  which  firft  becomes  greater  than  7, 
is  8  times,  therefore  we  may  multiply  the  firft  and  third 
by  8,  9,  10,  or  any  other  greater  number;  in  this  cafe,  let 
us  multiply  the  firft  and  third  by  8,  and  we  have  '^-^-f-  8 
and  :  again,  the  firft  multiple  of  ^  which  becomes 
greater  than  64  is  10  times;  then,  by  multiplying  the 
fecond  and  fourth  by  10,  we  ftiall  have  70  and  70  ;  then, 
arranging  thefe  multiples,  we  have — 

8  times  lo  times  8  times  lo  times 

the  first.  the  second.  the  third.  the  fourtli. 

6^+  8  -0  -o 

Confequently  04  -j-  8,  or  72,  is  greater  than  -o,  but  -t^ 
is  not  greater  than  70,  .•.  by  the  feventh  definition,  9  has  a 
greater  ratio  to  7  than      has  to  7 . 

The  above  is  merely  illuftrative  of  the  foregoing  demon- 
ftration,  for  this  property  could  be  fhown  of  thefe  or  other 
numbers  very  readily  in  the  following  manner ;  becaufe,  if 
an  antecedent  contains  its  confequent  a  greater  number  of 
times  than  another  antecedent  contains  its  confequent,  or 
when  a  fraction  is  formed  of  an  antecedent  for  the  nu- 
merator, and  its  confequent  for  the  denominator  be  greater 
than  another  fraction  which  is  formed  of  another  antece- 
dent for  the  numerator  and  its  confequent  for  the  denomi- 
nator, the  ratio  of  the  firft  antecedent  to  its  confequent  is 
greater  than  the  ratio  of  the  laft  antecedent  to  its  confe- 
quent. 

Thus,  the  number  9  has  a  greater  ratio  to  7,  than  8  has 
to  7,  for  ^  is  greater  than  -. 

Again,  17  :  19  is  a  greater  ratio  than  13  :  15,  becaufe 
17  17  X  15  _  255        J  13 13  X  19 247    , 

evident  that  ^  is  greater  than  |g,  .-.  J-^  is  greater  than 


1/2  BOOK  F.    PROP.  VIIT.    THEOR. 


— ,  and,  according  to  wliat  has  been  above  fliown,  17  has 
to  19  a  greater  ratio  than  13  has  to  15. 


So  that  the  general  terms  upon  which  a  greater,  equal, 
or  lefs  ratio  exifVs  are  as  follows  : — 

A  C  .         . 

If  g  be  greater  than  ^,  A  is  faid  to  have  to  B  a  greater 

A  C 

ratio  than  C  has  to  D  ;  if  —  be  equal  to  rr,  then  A  has  to 
B  the  fame  ratio  which  C  has  to  D  ;  and  if -^  be  lefs  than 
^,  A  is  faid  to  have  to  B  a  lefs  ratio  than  C  has  to  D. 

The  ftudent  fhould  underftand  all  up  to  this  propofition 
perfectly  before  proceeding  further,  in  order  fully  to  com- 
prehend the  following  propofitions  of  this  book.  We  there- 
fore ftrongly  recommend  the  learner  to  commence  again, 
and  read  up  to  this  flowly,  and  carefully  reafon  at  each  ftep, 
as  he  proceeds,  particularly  guarding  againlT;  the  mifchiev- 
ous  fyftem  of  depending  wholly  on  the  memory.  By  fol- 
lowing thefe  inftrudions,  he  will  find  that  the  parts  which 
ufually  prefent  confiderable  difficulties  will  prefent  no  diffi- 
culties whatever,  in  profecuting  the  ftudy  of  this  important 
book. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  IX.    THEOR. 


^71, 


AGNITUDES  which  have  the  fame  ratio  to  the 
fame  magnitude   are  equal  to   one  another ;  and 

thofe  to  which  the  fame  magnitude  has  t/ie  fame 

rat  to  are  equal  to  one  another. 

Let  ^  :  ^  :  :  0   :  p,  then  ^   =  0  . 
For,  if  not,  let  ▲    CI  0  ?  then  will 

4  :  «^  C  #   :        (B.  5-  pr.  8), 

which  is  abfurd  according  to  the  hypothefis. 
.*.    ^  is  not  C  0  . 

In  the  fame  manner  it  may  be  fhown,  that 
A  is  not  ^  ▲, 

/.  4  =#. 

Again,  let  H  :  ^   : :   '^'  :  ^  ,  then  will  ^    =  0  . 

For  (invert.)  ^   :  ||    : :  f|    :  H, 
therefore,  by  the  firft  cafe,  A  ^  A . 

,*.  Magnitudes  which  have  the  fame  ratio,  &c. 

This  may  be  {hown  otherwife,  as  follows : — 
Let   ^   :  B  ^  A   :  C,  then  B  =  C,  for,  as  the  fradlion 
—  =  the  fradlion  -,  and  the  numerator  of  one  equal  to  the 
numerator  of  the  other,  therefore  the  denominator  of  thefe 
fradlions  are  equal,  that  is  K  zz  C. 

Again,  if  B  :  ,\  =  C  :  A ,  B  =  C.     For,  as  -  =  "^, 
B  muft  =  (,. 


174 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  X.    THEOR. 


HAT  magnitude  which  has  a  greater  ratio  than 
another  has  unto  the  fame  magnitude,  is  the  greater 
of  the  two :  and  that  magnitude  to  which  the  fame 
has  a  greater  ratio  than  it  has  unto  another  mag- 
nitude, is  the  lefs  of  the  two. 

Let  ^  :         C  #  :  ■>  then  ^  d  # . 

For  if  not,  let  |p  =:  or  ^  0  ; 

then,  ^  :   si  =  #  :  B  (^-  5-  P^-  l)  or 

^  :   H  13  ^  :  ■  (B.  5.  pr.  8)  and  (invert.), 

which  is  abfurd  according  to  the  hypothefis. 

,*,   ■  is  not  =:  or  ^  ^ ,  and 
.'.    S  muft  he  r~  ^. 

Again,  let  «:  0  C  V  :  fP, 
then,  0  ID  ^> 

For  if  not,  0  mufl:  be  C  or  ^  1^ , 

then    flj:  0  Z]    p:  ^  (B-  5.  pr.  8)  and  (invert.); 

or  fl:  0  =:   H*  V  (B.  5.  pr.  7),  which  is  abfurd  (hyp.); 

/.    0  is  not  CZ  or  =  ^ , 

and  .'.  0  mufl  be  ^  ^ . 

.*.  That  magnitude  which  has,  &c. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XL    THEOR. 


^75 


ATIOS  t/iat  are  the  fame  to  the  fame  ratio,  are  the 
fame  to  each  other. 


Let  ^  :  ■  =  0  :  IP'  and  0  :  P  =  ▲  :  •, 
then  will  ^  :  H  =  ▲  :  •. 

For  if  M  ^   C  =,  or  13  m  H, 

then  M  0   IZ>  ^.  or  3]  w  ^, 

and  if  M  0  CZ,  ^,  or  ^  ;/;  t'   , 

then  M  A  C  =,  or  Z3  m  •,  (B.  5.  def.  5) ; 

,  if  M  ^  C,  ^,  or  ^  w  d  9  M  A  [Z,  =,  or  Zl  ^«  •> 
and  .*.  (B.  5.  def.  5)  ^   I  H  ^  A  :  •. 

.*,  Ratios  that  are  the  fame,  &c. 


176  BOOK  r.    PROP.  XII.    THEOR. 


F  afijf  number  of  tnagnitiides  be  proportionals,  as 
one  of  the  antecedents  is  to  its  confeqiient,  fo  f}:>all 
all  the  antecedents  taken  together  be  to  all  the 
confequents. 

then  will  |  :  #  = 
■  +0+        +«  +  ^:#  +  0+        +'  +  •• 

For  if  M  U  IZ  w  0,  then  M  Q  [Z  w  <>, 

and  M         \^tn         M  •  CZ  ^«  t, 

alfoM  ▲  IZ'«  ••  (B.  5.  def.  5.) 

Therefore,  if  M  JH  C  w  0,  then  will 

MJ+MQ  +  M        -I-M.  +  Ma, 

or  M  (H  +  O  +         +  •  +  ^)  be  greater 

tlian  ;;/  ^  •\-  tn  ^  -\-  m         •\'  ^'^  ▼  "h  ^^^  •> 

or;^(#  +0+    ,     +  ^  +  *)- 

In  the  fame  way  it  may  be  fhown,  if  M  times  one  of  the 
antecedents  be  equal  to  or  lefs  than  m  times  one  of  the  con- 
fequents, M  times  all  the  antecedents  taken  together,  will 
be  equal  to  or  lefs  than  ni  times  all  the  confequents  taken 
together.  Therefore,  by  the  fifth  definition,  as  one  of  the 
antecedents  is  to  its  confequent,  fo  are  all  the  antecedents 
taken  together  to  all  the  confequents  taken  together. 

.*,  If  any  number  of  magnitudes,  &c. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XIII.     THEOR. 


'77 


F  the  firjl  has  to  the  fecond  the  fame  ratio  which 

the  third  has  to  the  fourth,  but  the  third  to  the 

fourth  a  greater  ratio  than  the  fifth  has  to  the 

fixth ;  the  firfi  fhall  afo  have  to  the  fecond  a  greater 

ratio  than  the  fifth  to  the  fixth. 

Let  fP  :  O  =  ■  :  #  ,  but  ■  :  A   ci  O  :  #, 

then  fP  :  D  IZ  O  :  •• 

For,  becaufe  |  :  d  O  •  0>  there  are  fome  mul- 

tiples (M'  and  ;«')  of  |  and  ^^  and  of  ^    and  ^, 


fuch  that  M' 


m 


but  M'  <^  not  C  m   0,  by  the  feventh  definition. 

Let  thefe  multiples  be  taken,  and  take  the  fame  multiples 
of  ■   and  ([n. 
/.  (B.  5.  def.  5.)  if  M'  ^  C,  =,  or  Zl  /«'  Q  ; 
then  will  M'   |  C  =,  or  ^  m        , 
but  M'    ■  C  »^'  ^    (conftrudlion) ;     ■ 

.*.  M'  ^  C  ni  Q  , 

but  M'  <3  is  not  C  ni  0  (conflrudlion)  ; 
and  therefore  by  the  feventh  definition, 

W  :0  CIO 


^^v  * 


.*.   If  the  firll;  has  to  the  fecond,  &c. 


A  A 


178 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XIV.    THEOR. 


F  the  fir Jl  has  the  fame  ratio  to  the  fecondivhich  the 
third  has  to  the  fourth ;  then,  ifthefirjl  be  greater 
than  the  third,  thefecondjhall  be  greater  than  the 
fourth;  and  if  equal,  equal;  andiflefs,  lefs. 


Let  ^  :  Q  : :  B  :  ^ ,  and  firfl  fuppofe 
IP  [Z   »  ,  then  will  Q  C  ^  • 

For^rQCI         :  IJ  (B.5.pr.  8),  andbythe 
hypothefis,  ^  :  O  =  ^Ji  :  ^  ; 
/.  ■  :  ♦  CZ       :D(B.  s-pr-'is). 

/.   ♦  Z3  D  (B-  5-  pr-  io-)»  or  Q  C  ♦• 
Secondly,  let  ^  =  |P ,  then  will  ^  ^  ^ . 

For  ^  :  O  =         :  D  (B.  5.  pr.  7), 
and  ^  :  Q  =         :  ^  (hyp.) ; 

.*.  ■  :  D=   -V  :  ♦  (B.  5-  pr-  lO' 

and  /.  O  =  4  (B.  5,  pr.  9). 

Thirdly,  if  ^  13        ,  then  will  O  ZI  ♦  ; 
becaufe  C  W  ^"d         :  ^  =  ^  :  Q  ; 

/.   ^   C  O,  by  the  firft  cafe, 
that  is,  Q  13  ^ . 

/.  If  the  firft  has  the  fame  ratio,  &c. 


BOOKV.    PROP.  XV.    THEOR.  179 


AGNITUDES  /lave  the  fame  ratio  to  one  another 
which  their  equimultiples  have. 


Let  0  and         be  two  magnitudes ; 
then,  0  :  ■  : :  M'  0  :  M'  ^  ^^ 

For  A  :         =  a 


.*.  #  :  H  ::  4  •  :  4       •  (B.  5-  pr-  12)- 

And  as  the  fame  reafoning  is  generally  applicable,  we  have 
#  :  ■  ::  M'  A  :  M'h. 


/,  Magnitudes  have  the  fame  ratio,  &c. 


i8o  BOOKF.    DEFINITION  XIII. 


DEFINITION  XIII. 

The  technical  term  permutando,  or  alternando,  by  permu- 
tation or  alternately,  is  ufed  when  there  are  four  propor- 
tionals, and  it  is  inferred  that  the  firft  has  the  fame  ratio  to 
the  third  which  the  fecond  has  to  the  fourth ;  or  that  the 
firft  is  to  the  third  as  the  fecond  is  to  the  fourth :  as  is 
Ihown  in  the  following  propofition  : — 

Let#  :  4  ::19  :B) 

by  "  permutando"  or  "alternando"  it  is 
inferred    ^   :  ^  ••  ^  •  B  • 

It  may  be  neceffary  here  to  remark  that  the  magnitudes 
A,  ^j  V7H7  muft  be  homogeneous,  that  is,  of  the 
fame  nature  or  fimilitude  of  kind ;  we  muft  therefore,  in 
fuch  cafes,  compare  lines  with  lines,  furfaces  with  furfaces, 
folids  with  folids,  &c.  Hence  the  ftudent  will  readily 
perceive  that  a  line  and  a  furface,  a  furface  and  a  folid,  or 
other  heterogenous  magnitudes,  can  never  ftand  in  the  re- 
lation of  antecedent  and  confequent. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XVL    THEOR. 


i8i 


F  four  magnitudes  of  the  fame  kind  be  proportionals, 
they  are  afo  proportionals  ivhen  taken  alternately. 


Let  ^  :  Q  : :  H  :  ▲  ,  then  ip  :  B  -  U  •  ^  • 

ForM  fl  :  M  O  ::  ^  :  Q  (B.  5.  pr.  15), 

d  M  ^  :  M  Q  ::  H  :  ^   (^yP-)  ^nd  (B.  5.  pr.  11) 

alfo  /;;  m  :  /;;  ▲   '  •  H  *  ^    (^-  5-  P''-  ^ S)  > 

.*.  M  ^  :  M  Q  ::  w        :  /«  ^  (B.  5.  pr.  14), 

and  /.  if  M  ^  C.  =»  or  ^  zw  B  ? 

then  will  M  Q  C  :=,  or  33  ;«  ^    (B.  5.  pr.  14) ; 

therefore,  by  the  fifth  definition, 

.*.   If  four  magnitudes  of  the  fame  kind,  &c. 


1 82  BOOK  F.    DEFIXmOX  XFL 


DEFLS'ITIOX  XVI. 

DnmxxDO,  by  di^  i :- .        r  -   :h  ere  ire  :":  _ :  r :  :    :    ;    -  r , 

and  it  is  inferred,  l  i :  J-.e  exceli  : :      :  -    :  toood 

b  to  the  fecood,  £i  iJie  ev;      ;::;::::;  :r  :         -, 
b  to  tbe  fenrth. 

le:       :  3  ::C  :  D; 

far  **  diridendo  **  it  b  inferred 

A  miners  B  :  B  : :  C  minns  '^  :  ~" . 

Ac;     ;     r  ::  .    r  ::    -e,A  b  fbppt^i  ::  r-e  rti  ;'  ^  : 
B,  and  C    i:'-  -"       ;  if  thb  be  -::  ±:   :i  :     :ut  to 

have  r    :    i  ::   ::..-         :£  D  greater  iIjj:      .2        : 


S  :A  :-.  D  :C; 
-A  :A  ::       zuz^C   :C. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XVII.    THEOR.         183 


[F  magnitudes,  taken  jointly,  be  proportionals,  they 
Jhall  alfo  be  proportionals  ii-hen  taken  feparately  : 
\,  that  is,  if  tivo  magnitudes  together  have  to  one  of 
them  the  fame  ratio  which  two  others  have  to  one 
ofthefe,  the  remaining  one  of  the  fir  ft  two  Jhall  have  to  the  other 
the  fame  ratio  which  the  remaining  one  of  the  laft  two  has  to  the 
other  of  thefe. 

Let  tp  +  CI:  O  ::"  +  ♦:  ♦, 
then  will  ^  :  O  ::  ■  :  ♦. 

Take  M  ^  C  «  O  to  each  add  M  Q, 

then  we  have  M  V  +  M  Q  C  'w  O  +  M  Q, 

orM(V  +  CI)  C  (^^  +  M:  D: 

but  becaufe  IP  +  0:0::"+#:  ♦  (hyp.), 

and  M  (IP  +  O)  C  (;«  +  xM)  Q  ; 

.-.  M  (■  +  ♦)  C  (^^  +  M)  4  (B.  5.  def.  5) ; 

/.  M  ^  +  M  ♦[=//;♦+  M  ♦  ; 

.'.  M  '^  C  ^  ^ .  by  taking  M  ^  from  both  fides  : 

that  is,  when  'SI  ^  ^  m  U,  then  M         T~  m  ^ . 

In  the  Tame  manner  it  may  be  proved,  that  if 
M  ^  r=  or  ^  OT  U,  then  will  M         =r  or  — \  m  ^  • 
and  /.  V  :  O  :  :  ?     :  ♦  (B.  5.  def.  5). 

.*.   If  magnitudes  taken  jointly,  &c. 


l84  book  V.    DEFINITION  XV. 


DEFINITION  XV. 

The  term  componendo,  by  compofition,  is  ufed  when  there 
are  four  proportionals ;  and  it  is  inferred  that  the  firft  toge- 
ther with  the  fecond  is  to  the  fecond  as  the  third  together 
with  the  fourth  is  to  the  fourth. 

Let  A  :  B  : :       :  D  ; 

then,  by  the  term  "  componendo,"  it  is  inferred  that 
A-|.B:B::       -j-D:D. 

By  "  invertion"  B  and  O  may  become  the  firft  and  third, 
A  and  _    the  fecond  and  fourth,  as 

B  :   A  : :  D  :  C , 

then,  by  "  componendo,"  we  infer  that 
B  +  A  :  A  ; :  D  -|-  .   :  ^ . 


BOOK  F.    PROP.  XVIII.    THEOR. 


i8s 


F  magnitudes,  taken  feparately,  be  proportionals , 
they  fliall  alfo  be  proportionals  when  taken  jointly : 
that  is,  if  the  Jirji  be  to  the  fecond  as  the  third  is 
to  the  fourth,  the  firji.  and  fecond  together  fhall  be 
to  the  fecond  as  the  third  and  fourth  together  is  to  the  fourth. 


Let  IP  :  O 
then  fP  +  Q  :  Q 
for  if  not,  let  |p  -f-  Q 
fuppofing  ^ 

•  •  ^^  •  v^  •  • 

but  ^  :  Q  : : 


not  =  ^  ; 

•  (B.  5.  pr.  17); 

:  ^  (hyp.); 


.'•■:#::■:  4  (B.  5.  pr.  n); 

••••  =  ♦  (B.  5-  pr-  9). 

which  is  contrary  to  the  fuppofition ; 

.'.   ^  is  not  unequal  to  ^  ; 
that  is  0  =:  ^  ; 

*,  If  magnitudes,  taken  feparately,  &c. 


B  B 


i86 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XIX.    THEOR. 


F  a  isohole  magnitude  be  to  a  whole,  as  a  magnitude 
taken  from  the  firji,  is  to  a  magnitude  taken  from 
the  other ;  the  remainder  ffoall  be  to  the  remainder, 
as  the  ivhole  to  the  whole. 


Let  l^  +  O  :■  +  ♦::  IP  :■, 
then  will  Q:        ::'P>  +  0:H+'', 

For  tP  +  a  :  V  ::  ■  +  t  :  ■  (^l^er.), 

.*.  O  :  V  ••:  ♦  :■  (divid.), 

again  Q  :  4  ^^  9  ^  H  (alter.), 

butlP  +  0:»  +  #  ::^:B  hyp.); 

therefore  Q  :         : :  ^  +  D  :  ■  +  ♦ 

(B.  5.  pr.  11). 

,*,   If  a  whole  magnitude  be  to  a  whole,  &c. 


DEFINITION  XVII. 

The  term  "  convertendo,"  by  converfion,  is  made  ufe  of 
by  geometricians,  when  there  are  four  proportionals,  and 
it  is  inferred,  that  the  firft  is  to  its  excefs  above  the  fecond, 
as  the  third  is  to  its  excefs  above  the  fourth.  See  the  fol- 
lowing propofition  : — 


BOOK  V.     PROP.  E.    THEOR. 


187 


F  four  magnitudes  be  proportionals,  they  are  alfo 
proportionals  by  converjion :  that  is,  the  Jirjl  is  to 
its  excefs  above  the  fecond,  as  the  third  to  its  ex- 
cefs  above  the  fourth. 

then  fhall  •  O  •  •  ^  •  ■         '-W, 


Becaufe 
therefore  ' 

.-.  o 

•.  #0: 


:0::B  :       (divid.), 

i  ::  ^  :  ■  (inver.). 


(compo.). 


.'.  If  four  magnitudes,  &c. 


DEFINITION  XVIII. 

"  Ex  squall "  (fc.  diflantia),  or  ex  aequo,  from  equality  of 
diftance  :  when  there  is  any  number  of  magnitudes  more 
than  two,  and  as  many  others,  fuch  that  they  are  propor- 
tionals when  taken  two  and  two  of  each  rank,  and  it  is 
inferred  that  the  firft  is  to  the  laft  of  the  firft  rank  of  mag- 
nitudes, as  the  firft  is  to  the  laft  of  the  others :  "  of  this 
there  are  the  two  following  kinds,  which  arife  from  the 
different  order  in  which  the  magnitudes  are  taken,  two 
and  two." 


i88  BOOK  V.    DEFINITION  XIX. 


DEFINITION  XIX. 

"  Ex  asquali,"  from  equality.  This  term  is  ufed  iimply  by 
itfelf,  when  the  firft  magnitude  is  to  the  fecond  of  the  firft 
rank,  as  the  firft  to  the  fecond  of  the  other  rank. ;  and  as 
the  fecond  is  to  the  third  of  the  firft  rank,  fo  is  the  fecond 
to  the  third  of  the  other ;  and  fo  on  in  order :  and  the  in- 
ference is  as  mentioned  in  the  preceding  definition;  whence 
this  is  called  ordinate  proportion.  It  is  demonftrated  in 
Book  5.  pr.  22. 

Thus,  if  there  be  two  ranks  of  magnitudes, 

A,  B,     ,  .    ,  E,  F,  the  firft  rank, 

and  L,  M,  N  ,  <  ' ,  P,  Q,  the  fecond, 

fuch  that  A  :  B  : :  L  :  M,  B  :       ::  M  :      , 

C  :  U  : :  .\   :  ( ) ,  D  :  E  : :  o  :  P,  E  :  F  : :  P  :  Q  ; 

we  infer  by  the  term  "  ex  squali"  that 

A  :  F  ::  L  :Q. 


BOOK  F.    DEFINITION  XX.  189 


DEFINITION  XX. 

"  Ex  ^quali  in  proportione  perturbata  feu  inordinata," 
from  equality  in  perturbate,  or  diforderly  proportion.  This 
term  is  ufed  when  the  firft  magnitude  is  to  the  fecond  of 
the  firft  rank  as  the  laft  but  one  is  to  the  laft  of  the  fecond 
rank  ;  and  as  the  fecond  is  to  the  third  of  the  firft  rank,  fo 
is  the  laft  but  two  to  the  laft  but  one  of  the  fecond  rank  ; 
and  as  the  third  is  to  the  fourth  of  the  firft  rank,  fo  is  the 
third  from  the  laft  to  the  laft  but  two  of  the  fecond  rank ; 
and  fo  on  in  a  crofs  order :  and  the  inference  is  in  the  i8th 
definition.     It  is  demonftrated  in  B.  5.  pr.  23. 

Thus,  if  there  be  two  ranks  of  magnitudes, 
A. ,  B  ,  C ,  D  ,  E  ,  F  ,  the  firft  rank, 
and     ,  M  ,  N ,  O ,  P ,  Q ,  the  fecond, 
fuch  that  A  :  B  : :  P  :  Q ,  B  :  C  : :  O  :  P , 
C^  :  D  : :  N  :  O ,  D  :  '     : :    *    :  N ,       :       : :       :  vr  ; 
the  term  "  ex  xquali  in  proportione  perturbata  feu  inordi- 
nata" infers  that 
A  :  r    : :  ^   :  <,> . 


190 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XX.    THEOR. 


F  i/iere  be  three  magnitudes ,  and  other  three,  which, 
taken  two  and  two,  have  the  fame  ratio  ;  then,  if 
the  jirjl  be  greater  than  the  third,  the  fourth  fiall 
be   greater  than  the  fixth  ;  and  if  equal,  equal ; 
and  if  lefs,  lefs. 

Let  ^,  0>        J  be  the  firft  three  magnitudes, 
and  ^,  Oj  ^>  be  the  other  three, 

fuch  that  fp  :0  ::4  :0,andC)  :B  ::0:#- 

Then,  if  ^  IZ>  =»  or  Z]        ,  then  will  ^  CI,  =, 

orZl    ^. 
From  the  hypothefis,  by  alternando,  we  have 

andO  :0  ::■:•; 

.*.  "P  :♦::■:  •  (B.  5- pr-  n); 

/.  if  I^F  d,  =,  or  Z]       ,  then  will  ^  C  =, 

orI3         (B.  5.  pr.  14). 

,*,  If  there  be  three  magnitudes,  6cc. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XXL     THEOR. 


191 


F  t/iere  be  three  magnitudes,  arid  other  three  which 
have  the  fame  ratio,  taken  two  and  two,  but  in  a 
crofs  order  ;   then  if  the  fir  ft  magnitude  be  greater 
than  the  third,  the  fourth  fliall  be  greater  than  the 
fixth  ;  and  if  equal,  equal ;  and  if  lefs,  lefs. 


Let 


I,  be  the  firft  three  magnitudes, 


and  ^,  O*,  fpt,  the  other  three, 

fuch  that  ^  :  A  : :  O  •# >  ^"^  A  '  H  - •  ^  ■  O ' 

Then,  if  f     C.  =.  or  ID  ■,  then 
will  ♦  C  =,  Zl  #. 

Firft,  let  ^  be  C  ■  : 

then,  becaufe  ^  is  any  other  magnitude, 

¥•*!=■' A   (6.  5-pr.8); 

butO  :#::¥:  A  (^yp-); 
.-.  O  :#  !=■  :A  (B.  5-pr-  13); 

and  becaufe  {^   :  ■   ::  ^   :  (j   (hyp.) ; 
and  it  was  fliown  that  (^   '.  %    d  H    '  iil  > 

.*.  O  :  "    C  C    :  ♦  (B.  5-  pr-  13); 


192  BOOK  F.    PROP.  XXI.    THEOR. 

••  •   =]   ♦, 

that  is  ^    C      I . 

Secondly,  let         ^  H  ;  then  fhall  ^  =    ^. 

For  becaufe         ^  B, 

V  :*  =  ■  :dl  (B.  5.pr.7); 

but        :  il  =  0>  :        (hyp.). 

and  ^   *  A  =  O  :  ^  (hyp-  ^"'l  ifiv.), 

.-.  O  :   #  =  0  :  ♦  (B.  5.  pr.  II), 

.-.  ^  =    i    (B.  5.  pr.  9). 

Next,  let         be  Z3  ■?  then  ^  fhall  be  Z3        ; 

for  B   C 
and  it  has  been  (hown  that  (§  •   ^  ^  ^  *   ▼' 

and  il  :        =        :  O; 

/.  by  the  firft  cafe         is  C  ^j 
that  is,  ^   ^    9 . 

/.  If  there  be  three,  &c. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XXII.    THEOR. 


193 


F  there  be  any  number  of  magnitudes,  and  as  nuuiy 
others,  'which,  taken  two  and  two  in  order,  have 
the  fame  ratio  ;  the  frji  JJjall  have  to  the  lajl  of 
the  firft  magnitudes  the  fame  ratio  which  the  frji 
of  the  others  has  to  the  lajl  of  the  fame . 

N.B. —  This  is  ifually  cited  by  the  words  "ex  (egua/i,"  or 
"ex  cequo." 


irft,  let  there 

36  magnitud 

es^ 

and  as  many  others  ▲ 

,0  = 

? 

fuch  that 

w  •• 

♦  "♦  : 

0, 

and  ^ 

:il  ::0 

• 

> 

then  fliall 

1^  •  ^   •  • 
▼  • 

♦  = 

■«. 

Let  thefe  magnitudes,  as  well  as  any  equimultiples 
whatever  of  the  antecedents  and  confequents  of  the  ratios, 
lland  as  follows  : — 


and 

M  ^,«  ♦,  N   '    ,  M  ^,  w  <;>,  N      1, 

becaufe  |p  :  ^  : :  ^  :  O  ? 

::  M  ^  :/«<3  (B.  5.  p.  4). 

For  the  fame  reafon 

w  ^  :  N        : ;  /«  <^  :  N    |  ; 

and  becaufe  there  are  three  magnitudes, 
c  c 


/.Mm:  m 


194  BOOK  F.    PROP.  XXII.    THEOR. 

and  other  three,  M  ^  ,  w  <^ ,  N  0 , 
which,  taken  two  and  two,  have  the  fame  ratio ; 

/.  ifMip  CZ,  =,  ori:N  B 

then  will  M  ^   CZ.  =.  oi'  Z]  N        ,  by  (B.  5.  pr.  20) ; 

and  .*.  ^  :  ■ : :  ^   :  #  (def.  5). 

Next,  let  there  be  four  magnitudes,  ^  ,  ^,  H  ^  ^  » 

and  other  four,  ^  ,  ^,  IB ,  ▲  , 

which,  taken  two  and  two,  have  the  fame  ratio, 

that  is  to  fay,  ^   •  ^  •  •  O   '  #' 

♦  :■::•:      , 

and  A  :  ^  ::m  :  ▲, 

then  fhall  IP   :  ^   : :  O  *  ^  ' 

for,  becaufe  l[p  ,  ^^,        ,  are  tliree  magnitudes, 

and  <^  ,  ^f        ,  other  three, 

which,  taken  two  and  two,  have  the  fame  ratio ; 

therefore,  by  the  foregoing  cafe,  ^^   :  ■   : :  (2>   •  ^, 

but  a  :  4  :  •  «■  :  -^  ; 

therefore  again,  by  the  firfl;  cafe,  ip    :  ^   : :  (^   '-  ^  f 

and  fo  on,  whatever  the  number  of  magnitudes  be. 

,*,   If  there  be  any  number,  &c. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XXIII.    THEOR. 


195 


F  t/iere  be  afiy  number  of  tnagnitudes,  and  as  many 

others,  ivhich,  taken  two  and  two  in  a  crofs  order, 

have  the  fame  ratio  ;  the  firjl  fliall  have  to  the  laji 

of  the  firjl  magnitudes  the  fame  ratio  which  the 

firji  of  the  others  has  to  the  laji  of  the  fame. 

N.B. —  This  is  ifually  cited  by  the  words  "  ^x  aquali  in 
proportione  perturbatd ;"  or  "  ex  aquo  perturbato." 

Firft,  let  there  be  three  magnitudes,  ^j(^>  |) 

and  other  three,    '  >  O '  ^ » 

which,  taken  two  and  two  in  a  crofs  order, 

have  the  fame  ratio  ; 


o 


Let  thefe  magnitudes  and  their  refpective  equimuhiples 
be  arranged  as  follows  : — 

M       ,M^,m^,M    ,,,m(^,m%, 

then    f  IQ   ::M    '     :  M  Q   (B.  5.  pr.  15); 

and  for  the  fame  reafon 

but^  :q  ::<2>  :0  (hyp.). 


that  is,    |;  : 

U  ' 

:o 

and  Q 

:■  : 

•♦ 

then  fhall  ^ 

:■  : 

=  ♦ 

196 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XXIII.     THEOR. 


.-.  M  ip  :MQ  ::<^  :#  (B.  5.  pr.  n); 

and  becaufe  O  :  ■   : :   ^  :  <2>  (Jiyp-)> 

.-.  M  Q  :  w  H  : :    ^  :  w  ^  (B.  5.  pr.  4) ; 

then,  becaufe  there  are  three  magnitudes, 

M  W,  M  Q,  w  ■, 

and  other  three,  M        ,  m  (2),  w  ^ , 

which,  taken  two  and  two  in  a  crofs  order,  have 

the  fame  ratio ; 

therefore,  if  M  [^,  ^,  or  "H  ;;;  J  j 

then  will  M         [Z,  =r,  or  ;i]  ;;/  0   (B.  5.  pr.  21), 

and  /.    ,;;  :  ■  ::   -J.  :  #  (B.  5.  def.  5). 

Next,  let  there  be  four  magnitudes, 

and  other  four,  (2)j  ^j  ■>  A.? 

which,  when  taken  two  and  two  in  a  crofs  order,  have 
the  fame  ratio  ;   namely. 


IP 

:D 

::  ■ 

D 

■ 

::• 

andH 

•  •# 

-0 

en  fhall 

"O 

For,  becaufe  ^^  ^,  |  are  three  magnitudes, 


BOOKF.    PROP.  XXIII.    THEOR.  197 

and  9,  SI,  i^,  other  three, 

which,  taken  two  and  two  in  a  crofs  order,  have 

the  fiime  ratio, 
therefore,  by  the  firfl  cafe,  ^  :  H  ••  0  •  ^^ 

but  ■  :        ::  <^  :  #, 

therefore  again,  by  the  firft  cafe,  y  :  ^  : :  /S  '   A  ? 
and  i'o  on,  whatever  be  the  number  of  fuch  magnitudes. 

.*.   If  there  be  any  number,  &c. 


198 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  XXIV.    THEOR. 


jF  the  firji  has  to  the  fecond  the  fame  ratio  which 
the  third  has  to  the  fourth,  and  the  fifth  to  the 
fecond  the  fame  which  the  fix th  has  to  the  fourth, 
the  fir fi  and  fifth  together  Jhall  have  to  the  fecond 

the  fame  ratio  which  the  third  and  fix  th  together  have  to  the 

fourth. 


First. 


Fifth. 


Second. 

D 


Third. 


Sixth. 


Fourth. 


Let  ip  : 

U: 

:a:<^, 

and  (2>  : 

D: 

:•:#. 

'+0 

•Q: 

•  ■  +  •  :  4 

then 

For  <2>:D--:  #:  ^  (%P-). 

and  Q  :  ^  ::  ^  :  B  (^yP-)  ^"^  (invert.), 

.-.   0>  •¥::#:■  (B-  5-  Pr-  22); 

and,  becaufe  thefe  magnitudes  are  proportionals,  they  are 

proportionals  when  taken  jointly, 

.••  V+  0:0::  •+  ■:  •  (B.  5- pr-  18), 

but  o  :  D  • :  •  •  '-    (hypO. 

.-.  V  +  O  :  U  ::#+■•  t   (B.  5-  pr.  22). 


/.  If  the  firft,  &c. 


BOOK  V.   PROP.  XXV.   THEOR. 


199 


F  four  magnitudes  of  the  fame  kind  are  propor- 
tionals, the  greatejl  and  leaf  of  them  together  are 
greater  than  the  other  two  together. 


Let  four  magnitudes,  ■  -j-  ^,   H  -|-  ■-'  ,  |^,  and    |^ , 
of  the  fame  kind,  be  proportionals,  that  is  to  fay, 

and  let  ■  -f-  O  ^^  ^^  greateft  of  the  four,  and  confe- 

quently  by  pr.  A  and  14  of  Book  5,  ^  is  the  leaft ; 

then  will  ^+1314-         beClB+         +D; 

becaufe  If  +  Q  :■+>::  O  :  ♦, 


but 


+  Dl=  ■  + 


(B.  5.  pr.  19), 

(hyp.). 


.'.  "f   [=  ■(B.  5.  pr.  A); 
to  each  of  thefe  add  O  "4"  ^7 

•*.  fP  +  O  +     1=  ■  +  o  +  ♦■ 

If  four  magnitudes,  &c. 


2o,o  BOOK  V.    DEFINITION  X. 


DEFINITION  X. 

When  three  magnitudes  are  proportionals,  the  firfl  is  laid 
to  have  to  the  third  the  dupHcate  ratio  of  that  which  it  has 
to  the  fecond. 

For  example,  if  A,  b',  C,  be  continued  proportionals, 
that  is,  A  :  B  ::  B  :  C,  A  is  faid  to  have  to  C  the  dupli- 
cate ratio  of  x\  :  B  ; 

or  —  r=  the  fquare  of  — . 
This  property  will  be  more  readily  feen  of  the  quantities 

'J  ^"f  ,       ,  J,  tor  /T  !'       '.  u  '   '.'.  li  ■     '•  a  \ 

and  —  ^  r^  r=  the  fquare  of  —  =  r. 


or  of  iJy 


f  jr~  , 


for  —  ^  -3  =  the  fquare  of —  =:— . 
a  r  "  ' 


DEFINITION  XI. 

When  four  magnitudes  are  continual  proportionals,  the 
firft  is  faid  to  have  to  the  fourth  the  triplicate  ratio  of  that 
which  it  has  to  the  fecond ;  and  fo  on,  quadruplicate,  &c. 
increafing  the  denomination  ftill  by  unity,  in  any  number 
of  proportionals. 

For  example,  let.  A,  B,  C,  D,  be  four  continued  propor- 
tionals, that  is,  A  ;  :  : :  :  C  ::  C  :  D ;  A  is  faid  to  have 
to  D,  the  triplicate  ratio  of  N  to  iJ ; 

or  -  :=  the  cube  of—. 


BOOK  K    DEFINITION  XL  201 

This  definition  will  be  better  underftood,  and  applied  to 
a  greater  number  of  magnitudes  than  four  that  are  con- 
tinued proportionals,  as  follows  : — 

Let^r",      '  yar>  ^y  be  four  magnitudes  in  continued  pro- 
portion, that  is,  ^  »■':': :  '■  ar  '-'-ar  '•  (i, 

.       ar'  „  ,  ,         -ar^ 

then =:  r"  r=  the  cube  or  —  ^  r. 

a 

Or,  let  ar',  ar*,  ar^,  ur',  ar,  a,  be  fix  magnitudes  in  pro- 
portion, that  is 

ar*  :  rtr*  ::  ar^  ■  ar*  ::  ar"  :  ar"  ::  ar'  :  ar  ::  ar  :  a, 

a  r  -  a  r 

then  the  ratio  —  =  r"  zrz  the  fifth  power  of  — :  zr:  r. 
a  ^  rtr* 

Or,  let  a,  ar,  ar^,  ar^,  ar*,  be  five  magnitudes  in  continued 
proportion;  then  — 5  :=  -5  =z  the  fourth  power  of —  ::=:-. 


DEFINITION  A. 

To  know  a  compound  ratio : — 

When  there  are  any  number  of  magnitudes  of  the  fame 
kind,  the  firfi:  is  faid  to  have  to  the  lafl:  of  them  the  ratio 
compounded  of  the  ratio  which  the  firfl  has  to  the  fecond, 
and  of  the  ratio  which  the  fecond  has  to  the  third,  and  of 
the  ratio  which  the  third  has  to  the  fourth  ;  and  fo  on,  unto 
the  lafl;  magnitude. 

For  example,  if  A ,  B ,  C ,  D , 
be  four  magnitudes  of  the  fame 
kind,  the  firft  A  is  faid  to  have  to 
the  lafl:  D  the  ratio  compounded 
of  the  ratio  of  A  to  B ,  and  of  the 
ratio  of  B  to  C ,  and  of  the  ratio  of  C  to  D  ;  or,  the  ratio  of 

DD 


A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

s 

K 

L 

202  BOOKF.    DEFINITION  A. 

A  to  D  is  faid  to  be  compounded  of  the  ratios  of  \  to  B , 
B  to  C  ,  and  c    to  |j. 

And  if  A  has  to  B  the  fame  ratio  which  1  has  to  V ,  and 
B  to  C  the  fame  ratio  that  G  has  to  H,  and  C  to  D  the 
fame  that  K  has  to  L  ;  then  by  this  definition,  \  is  said  to 
have  to  L>  the  ratio  compounded  of  ratios  which  are  the 
fame  with  the  ratios  of  E  to  F,  G  to  H,  and  K  to  L.  And 
the  fame  thing  is  to  be  underftood  when  it  is  more  briefly 
exprefled  by  faying,  \  has  to  D  the  ratio  compounded  of 
the  ratios  oft  to  F,  G  to  H,  and  K  to  I  . 

In  like  manner,  the  fame  things  being  fuppofed  ;   if 
has  to       the  fame  ratio  which  \  has  to  D,  then  for  fhort- 
nefs  fake,        is  faid  to  have  to        the  ratio  compounded  of 
the  ratios  of  E  to  F,  G  to  H,  and  K  to  L. 

This  definition  may  be  better  underftood  from  an  arith- 
metical or  algebraical  illuftration  ;  for,  in  fact,  a  ratio  com- 
pounded of  feveral  other  ratios,  is  nothing  more  than  a 
ratio  which  has  for  its  antecedent  the  continued  produdl  of 
all  the  antecedents  of  the  ratios  compounded,  and  for  its 
confequent  the  continued  produdl  of  all  the  confequents  of 
the  ratios  compounded. 

Thus,  the  ratio  compounded  of  the  ratios  of 

2  :  ;,   4 :  7,   6  :  1  1,   2  :  5, 

is  the  ratio  of  ;  X      X  6  X  2  :       X       X   1  1   X  5, 

or  the  ratio  of  96  :  11  55,  or  -^2  :  385. 

And  of  the  magnitudes  A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F,  of  the  fame 
kind,  A  :  F  is  the  ratio  compounded  of  the  ratios  of 
A  :  B,  B  :  C   C  :  D,   D  :  E,   E  :  F ; 
for  A  X  B  X       X       X  E  :  B  X  C  X       x  E  X  F, 

^^    nx'x      XEXF  =  T'  ""^  ^^^  ""^"^  °^  "^  '■  ^' 


BOOK  r.     PROP.  F.    THEOR. 


203 


ATIOS  wAic/i  are  cojnpounded  of  the  fame  ratios 
are  the  fame  to  one  another. 


Let  A  :  B  : :  F  :  G, 
B  :  C  ::  G  :  H, 
C:  D::H:K, 

and  D  :  E  ::  K  :  L. 


A  B  C   D  E 
F  G  H  K  L 


Then  the  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  the  ratios  of 
A  :  R,  ^  :  ,  :  ,  :  t  ,  or  the  ratio  of  A  :  E,  is  the 
fame  as  the  ratio  compounded  of  the  ratios  of  F  :  G, 
G  :  H,  H  :  K,  K  :  L,  or  the  ratio  of  F  :  L. 


For  ^  = 

F 

G' 

B    

C    ~" 

G 
H' 

C    __ 
D    "■ 

H 
K' 

a„d^  = 

K 

AX 

XX        

F  X 
X 

X 
X 

X  -: 

X 

X     X  ■    — 

X  L 

and  /.  - 

F 
—    L 

or  the  ratio  of  A :  E  is  the  fame  as  the  ratio  of  F  :  L. 

The  fame  may  be  demonflrated  of  any  number  of  ratios 
fo  circumftanced. 


Next,  let  A  :  B  : :  K  :  L, 
B:  C::  H:  K, 
C:  D::  G:  H, 
D:  E  ::  F:  G. 


204  BOOK  V.    PROP.  F.     THEOR. 

Then  the  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  the  ratios  of 
A  :  B,  B  :  C,  C  :  D,  D  :  E,  or  the  ratio  of  A  :  E,  is  the 
fame  as  the  ratio  compounded  of  the  ratios  of  :L,  :  K, 
G  :  H,  F  :     ,  or  the  ratio  of  F  :L. 


For  -  =  -, 


I 


and  —  =:  — ; 

r. 
A  X      X      X  D    .  X       X       X  F 


X  ^^  X  E   —  L  X       X       X  G  * 


^•■"^  •••!  =  -' 


F 

L 

or  the  ratio  of  A  :  ¥  is  the  fame  as  the  ratio  of  F  :  L. 
,",  Ratios  which  are  compounded,  &c. 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  G.    THEOR. 


205 


F  fever al  ratios  be  the  fame  to  fever al  ratios,  each 

to  each,  the  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  ratios 

which  are  the  fame  to  the  firft  ratios,  each  to  each, 

jhall  be  the  fame  to  the  ratio  compounded  of  ratios 

which  are  the  fame  to  the  other  ratios,  each  to  each. 


A  B  C:  D  E  ¥  G  H 

P   Q    R    S  T 

a    bed    e  f   g    h 

V  w  X  y 

If  A  :  B  : :  d  :  ^ 

and  A  :  B  : :  P  : 

Q 

a:b:: 

:  \\ 

CD  ::€  -.d 

C:D::Q: 

R 

c:d:: 

w 

:  X 

E:F  ::e:f 

E:F  ::R 

S 

e:f:: 

X 

:  Y 

and  G  :  II ::  g  :  A 

G:H::  S  : 

T 

g:h:: 

Y 

:  Z 

then  P  :  T  =  ^  " 

•     • 

p^^     P     A     a 

Z3 

> 

2  —  ^'  -  i- 

R               D     d 

= 

> 

R     __     E    e 

S"    — *     F     —      7 

^ 

9 

^     G     ff 

f     H     h 

) 

and    •     ''  X  9  X  k  X  ■     __ 
^""^  •  •  0  X  R  X  s  X  r    — 

X 
X 

X       X 
X      X 

~ » 

and   /.    -p    =    - 

~  > 

01 

rP  :  T  =        : 

'/.. 

If  feveral  ratios,  &c. 


2o6 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  H.    THEOR. 


F  a  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  fever  al  ratios  be 
the  fame  to  a  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  fever  al 
other  ratios  ;  and  if  one  of  the  firjl  ratios,  or  the 
ratio  which  is  compounded  of  fever  al  of  them,  be 
the  fame  to  one  of  the  laji  ratios,  or  to  the  ratio  which  is  com- 
pounded of  Jeveral  of  them ;  then  the  remaining  ratio  ofthefirjl, 
or,  if  there  be  more  than  one,  the  ratio  compounded  of  the  re- 
maining ratios,  JJi all  be  the  fame  to  the  remaining  ratio  of  the 
la/i,  or,  if  there  be  more  than  one,  to  the  ratio  compounded  of  thefe 
remaining  ratios. 


A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

F 

Q 

R 

S 

T 

X 

Let  A  :  B,  B  :  C,  C  :  D,  D  :  E,  E  :  F,  F  :  G,  G  :  H, 
be  the  firft  ratios,  and  P  :  Q^_Qj^R,  R  :  S,  S  :  T,  T  :  X, 
the  other  ratios ;  alfo,  let  A  :  H,  which  is  compounded  of 
the  iirfl:  ratios,  be  the  fame  as  the  ratio  of  P  :  X,  which  is 
the  ratio  compounded  of  the  other  ratios ;  and,  let  the 
ratio  of  A  :  E,  which  is  compounded  of  the  ratios  of  A  :  B, 
B  :  C,  C  :  D,  D  :  E,  be  the  fame  as  the  ratio  of  P  :  R, 
which  is  compounded  of  the  ratios  P  :  Q,^  Qj  R. 

Then  the  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  the  remaining 
firft  ratios,  that  is,  the  ratio  compounded  of  the  ratios 
E  :  F,  F  :  G,  G  :  H,  that  is,  the  ratio  of  E  :  H,  fhall  be 
the  fame  as  the  ratio  of  R :  X,  which  is  compounded  of 
the  ratios  of  R :  S,  S  :  T,  T  :  X,  the  remaining  other 
ratios. 


Becaufe  - 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  H.    THEOR.  207 


,  X  f.  X  C  X  D  X  L  X  J:  X  &  P  X  Q  X  R  X  S  X    I 


l;  X  L   X  D  X  E  X  F  X  G  X  H  Q  X  R  X  s  X  'I'  X  X' 

,  X  [;  X  C  X  1^    w    K  X  F  X  G   P  X  Q    w    R  X  S  x   f 

f!  X  L   X  D  X  K    •^    h-  X(,XU    —    O  X  R    ^    ^  X  T  X  X' 

anH      ^  X  B  X  C  X  D    _    P  X  Q 
^   E  XCX  DX  E    —    Qx  R' 

,     E  X  F  X  G    R  X  -  X    I 

•  *    F  X  G  X  H  i  X   I    X  X» 

/.   E  :  H  =  R  :  X. 
,*,   If  a  ratio  which,  &c. 


2o8 


BOOK  V.    PROP.  K.     THEOR. 


F  t/iere  be  any  number  of  ratios,  and  any  number  of 
other  ratios,  fuch  that  the  ratio  which   is  com- 
pounded of  ratios,  which  are  the  fame  to  the  frji 
ratios,  each  to  each,  is  the  fame  to  the  ratio  which 
is  compounded  of  ratios,  which  are  the  fame,  each  to  each,  to 
the  lajl  ratios — and  if  one  of  the  firji  ratios,  or  the  ratio  which 
is  compounded  of  ratios,  which  are  the  fame  to  federal  of  the 
firjl  ratios,  each  to  each,  be  the  fame  to  one  of  the  lajl  ratios, 
or  to  the  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  ratios,  which  are  the 
fame,  each  to  each,  to  fever al  of  the  lajl  ratios — then  the  re- 
maining ratio  of  the  firjl ;  or,  if  there  be  more  than  one,  the 
ratio  which  is  compounded  of  ratios,  which  are  the  fame,  each 
to  each,  to  the  remaining  ratios  of  the  firJi,  Jhall  be  the  fame 
to  the  remaining  ratio  of  the  lajl ;  or,  if  there  be  more  than 
one,  to  the  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  ratios,  which  are  the 
fame,  each  to  each,  to  thefe  remaining  ratios. 


h     k  m    n    s 

AB,  CD,  EF,  GH,  K  L,  MN. 

a  b  c   d  e  t  g 

O  P ,  O  R  ,  S  T ,  V  W ,  X  Y , 

h  k  I  m  n  p 

abed           e      i  g 

Let  A:B,  C:D,  E:F,  G:H,  K:L,  M:N,  be  the 
firft  ratios,  and  o  :!',  (^:R  ,  ^  :T,  V  :W,  X  :  ,  the 
other  ratios ; 


and  let  A  :  B 

zn  a   '.  b  , 

C  :D 

=  b  :c. 

E  :F 

HZ    L    id. 

G  :H 

~~7.  'i  : ''  J 

K  :  L 

—  e  :f. 

M:N 

T"^     /     I  P"  • 

BOOK  F.    PROP.  K.     THEOR.  209 

Then,  by  the  definition  of  a  compound  ratio,  the  ratio 
of  ,7  In-  is  compounded  of  the  ratios  of  j  :/,,  /;  ic,  c  -Jt  J  ','> 
g  :/"./"■?-.  which  are  the  fame  as  the  ratio  of  A  :  B,  C  :  D, 
E  :  F,    G  :  H,    K  :  L,    M  :  N,  each  to  each. 


Alfo, 

:^       ^;    h 

•k. 

Q^ 

\R     •=.   k 

:/. 

:      : 

T     =    /: 

m. 

V    : 

VV    =  m 

:  n. 

--        ; 

—    n 

P- 

Then  will  the  ratio  oi  h\p  be  the  ratio  compounded  of 
the  ratios  of  h:k,  k:l,  I '.my  m'.n,  n:p,  which  are  the 
fame  as  the  ratios  of  :p  ,  Ct  :R  ,  S  :T  ,  V  :W  ,  X  :Y  , 
each  to  each. 

/,  by  the  hypothefis  a  '•!?  =  h:p. 

Alfo,  let  the  ratio  which  is  compounded  of  the  ratios  of 
A:  B,  C  :  D,  two  of  the  firfl:  ratios  (or  the  ratios  of  j  ict 
for  \  :  ^  =  J  :  A,  and  C" :  P  =  , :  ),  be  the  fame  as  the 
ratio  of  a :  d,  which  is  compounded  of  the  ratios  of  a  :  b, 
b  :  c,  c  :  d,  which  are  the  fame  as  the  ratios  of  :  , 
:      ,       :      ,  three  of  the  other  ratios. 

And  let  the  ratios  of  h  :  s,  which  is  compounded  of  the 
ratios  of  h  :  k,  k  :  m,  m  :  n,  n  :  s,  which  are  the  fame  as 
the  remaining  firft  ratios,  namely,  E  :  F,  G  :  H,  K  :  L, 
M  :  N  ;  alfo,  let  the  ratio  of  e  :  g,  be  that  which  is  com- 
pounded of  the  ratios  e  :  f,  f :  g,  which  are  the  fame,  each 
to  each,  to  the  remaining  other  ratios,  namely,  V  :W, 
X  :  Y  .  Then  the  ratio  of  h  :  s  fhall  be  the  fame  as  the 
ratio  of  e  :  g ;  or  h  :  s  r=  erg. 

p         AXCXKX'.XKXM    g  X  6  X  ,-  X  ,i  X  r  X  /• 

:-^  X  11  X  F  X  H  X  I    X  X    — -   6  X  c  X  i  X  .  X/  X  y  ' 

£  £ 


2IO  BOOK  V.    PROP.  K.     THEOR. 

,     OX  ox  ^X   .  X   ■    ^x^x^x?»x» 

^  X    R  X    I  X    V,  X  kXlXmXnXp 

by  the  compolition  of  the  ratios  ; 

.      cX/XcXrfXfX;      h  X  kX   I  XrnXn 


''iXcXdXfXfXj  kX  I  Xm  X  n  Xp 


(hyp.). 


uXl     w     c  X  ^  X  £  X /    kX  kX  I      w 

.7  X  c      ^     dX  cX/Xg  kX  t  Xm     ^      n   Xp' 

but    — —  A  X  C    __    ^-  X       X         .    a  Xb  Xc     __    h  Xk  X  i  . 

;X.  £XD  ;X       X  bxcxd  kX I Xm' 

,      f  X  -J  X  f  X  ;     _.     »t  X  n 
'  '     i  X  e  X  fX  i'  n   Xp' 


A„J      C  X  ^"  X  t   X  •     h  X  k    X  m  X  n     ,,  . 

And        .v.  V^vV     —     k  VmVn    Vs     ("7?-). 


>?Xc  X/X^ 

k 

X  m 

X 

n    X  s 

and 

m  X  n 
n    Xp 

— 

e 
T 

X  f 

Xg 

(hyp.). 

• 
•  • 

h  X  k   X  m 
k  X  m  X  n 

X 
X 

n     . 

s 

— 

e  f 

• 
•     • 

s 

^^ 

e 

/.   h 

:  s   : 

— 

e  : 

g- 

/,  If  there  be  any  number,  &c. 


;  *  Al"-ebraical  and  Arithmetical  expositions  of  the  Fifth  Book  of  Euclid  are  given  m 
Hyrne's  Doctrine  of  Proportion  ;  published  by  Williams  and  Co.  London.  1841. 


BOOK  VI. 
DEFINITIONS. 

I. 

ECTILINEAR 

figures  are  faid  to 

be    fimilar,    when 

they  have  their  fe- 
veral  angles  equal,  each  to  each, 
and  the  fides  about  the  equal 
angles  proportional. 

II. 

Two  fides  of  one  figure  are  faid  to  be  reciprocally  propor- 
tional to  two  fides  of  another  figure  when  one  of  the  fides 
of  the  firft  is  to  the  fecond,  as  the  remaining  fide  of  the 
fecond  is  to  the  remaining  fide  of  the  firft. 

III. 

A  STRAIGHT  line  is  faid  to  be  cut  in  extreme  and  mean 
ratio,  when  the  whole  is  to  the  greater  fegment,  as  the 
greater  fegment  is  to  the  lefs. 

IV. 

The  altitude  of  any  figure  is  the  straight  line  drawn  from 
its  vertex  perpendicular  to  its  bafe,  or  the  bafe  produced. 


2;2 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  I.    THEOR. 


RIANGLES 

and      parallelo- 
grams having  the 
fame  altitude  are 
to  one  another  as  their  bafes. 


Let  the  triangles 


1    and  m 


have  a  common  vertex,  and 


their  bafes 


and 


in  the  fame  ftraight  hne. 


Produce  i  both  ways,  take  fucceffively  on 

— —  produced  lines  equal  to  it ;  and  on  — — —  pro- 
duced lines  succefTively  equal  to  it ;  and  draw  lines  from 
the  common  vertex  to  their  extremities. 


A 


The   triangles    j^-JKJt^    thus  formed  are  all  equal 
to  one  another,  fmce  their  bafes  are  equal.  (B.  i .  pr.  38.) 


A 


and  its  bafe  are  refpectively  equi- 


i 


multiples  of  ■  and  the  bafe 


BOOK  VL     PROP.  I.    THEOR.  2-  3 


^ 


In  like  manner    »         _        and  its  bafe  are   refpec- 


i 


lively  equimultiples  of  |^    and  the  bafe  — — . 

.*.  Ifm  or  6  times  ^  (^  :=  or  13  «  or  5  times  B 
then  m  or  6  times  — —  C  ^  or  ;^  «  or  5  times  u-mi  , 
m  and  «  ftand  for  every  multiple  taken  as  in  the  fifth 
definition  of  the  Fifth  Book.  Although  we  have  only 
fhown  that  this  property  exifts  when  m  equal  6,  and  n 
equal  5,  yet  it  is  evident  that  the  property  holds  good  for 
every  multiple  value  that  may  be  given  to  m,  and  to  n. 


a 


(B.  5.  def  5.) 


Parallelograms  having  the  fame  altitude  are  the  doubles 
of  the  triangles,  on  their  bafes,  and  are  proportional  to 
them  (Part  i),  and  hence  their  doubles,  the  parallelograms, 
are  as  their  bafes.  (B.  5.  pr.  15.) 

Q.  E.  D. 


214 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  II.    THEOR. 


* 


F  a  Jlraight  line 


be  draivn  parallel  to  any 
Jide  ■——■■->  of  a  tri- 
angle, it  fliall  cut  the  other 
tides,  or  thoj'e  Jides  produced,  into  pro- 
portional fegments  . 

And  if  any  Jlraight  line  ^— ^— 


divide  the  fides  of  a  triangle,  or  thofe 
fides  produced,  into  proportional  feg- 
ments, it  is  parallel  to  the  remaining 
fide  —■•■-■■■■■», 


Let 


PART  I. 


I,  then  {hall 


•  ••    '    ■•• 


Draw 


and 


and 


(B.  I.  pr.  37); 


■V- 


V 


\- 


^   :  !    \    (B.5.pr.7);but 


(B.  6.  pr.  1), 


(■■■■■■■■■*        •  I 


•  «■■■■«■■■«        *        IttlllllBlB*, 


(B.  5.  pr.  II). 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  11.    THEOR. 


21 


PART  II. 


Let 


Let  the  fame  conftrudlion  remain. 


becaulc 


:  ::    1/    :    •   \ 


>   (B.6.  pr.  I); 


and 


■  »«aiaflVB»« 


■  « 

•       •        • 


but 


«■■■  ^aai^ 


i\ 


/ 


-Z= 


(hyp.), 


),     :    i   \     (B.  5.  pr.  1 1 .) 


:.    (B.  5-  pr-  9) ; 

■■■■■■•.  ,  and  at  the 


but  they  are  on  the  fame  bafe  -■■■■■•■i 
fame  fide  of  it,  and 

•°.   II    (B-  i.pr.  39) 


Q.  E.  D. 


2l6 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  III.    THEOR. 


RIGHT  /ine  (  ) 

bifeSling  the  angle  of  a 
triangle,  divides  the  op- 
pofite  Jide  into  fegments 
— — ™)  proportional 


to  the  conterminous  Jides  (- 

)• 

And  if  a  Jiraight  line  (- 


— ) 
drawn  from  any  angle  of  a  triangle 
divide  the  oppojite  Jide  (  ■■■■■■) 

into  fegments  (  ,  ....■■■■..) 

proportional  to  the  conterminous  fides  (— — — ,  ■     ), 

it  bifeSls  the  angle. 


PART  I. 


Draw  -■ 


to  meet 


then,  ^     ^   (B.  i.pr.  29), 

^  =  <  ;  but  ^  =  1  ,  .-.  ^    =-# , 
.*.  ..........    =   I  I     (B.  I.  pr.  6); 


and  becaufe 


■  ■■■■■■■IHB 


(B.  6.  pr.  2) ; 


but 


(B.  5.  pr.  7). 


BOOK  FI.     PROP.  III.    THEOR.  217 


PART  II. 

Let  the  fame  conftrudtion  remain, 


and 


(B.  6.  pr.  2)  ; 

but  — ^.^  :  .........  ::  «-..—. ;  ...^^     (hyp.) 


■■.■■■• 


(B.  5.  pr.  .1). 
and  ,*,    ■.■■•■■■a.  zzz  ■  (B.  c.  pr.  o), 

and  /.    ^  =    ^(B.  I.  pr.  5);  but  fince 
II    «..;    ^   _     ^^ 

and     ^    =    ^  (B.  i.  pr.  29); 
/.    ^  =y,    and  =:    ^, 


and  .*.    ........    bifedls       ^ 


Q^E.  D. 


F  F 


«^i8 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  IV.    THEOR. 


N    equiatigular    tri- 
angles   (    ^  \ 


and      ,-•'*        \  )   the  fides 
about  the  equal  angles  are  pro- 
portional, and  the  Jides  which  are 
^L       oppojite  to  the  equal  angles  are 


homologous. 


Let  the  equiangular  triangles  be  fo  placed  that  two  fides 

^^    and 


oppofite  to  equal  angles 


^^^  may  be  conterminous,  and  in  the  fame  ftraight  line; 
and  that  the  triangles  lying  at  the  fame  fide  of  that  flraight 
line,  may  have  the  equal  angles  not  conterminous, 

ofite  to    jtKk  ,  and  fl^    to   j^|^  . 


1.  e. 


opp 


Draw    -■•■■••■••t  and 


',     Then,  becaufe 


▲  =  ▲ 


II 


and  for  a  like  reafon,  •■•■—■•■• 
-  -     „ / 


;B.i.pr.28); 

■    ""•"5 


is  a  parallelogram. 


But 


(B.  6.  pr.  2) ; 


BOOK  FI.    PROP.  IF.    THEOR.  219 

and  lince  '  ^   — — —    (B.  i.  pr.  34), 

^_i.    :   .......«i..  *  and  by 


•  • 


alternation,  — ^— ^  :  — — — ^  j:  -—.-««—  ;  — 

(B.  5.  pr.  16). 

In  like  manner  it  may  be  fhown,  that 

■^i^HMiMaBH^  ■«»•«■«■«»«  ^^B^i^ia^^^  iiMiJiiaiiia* 

and  by  alternation,  that 

•■■^^■^■Ma  o^^^^^^^       JJ     •■■■■■■•■^       J      ■■■■■■■■■■* 

but  it  has  been  already  proved  that 

^a^^^^^^^m  *  ^MMHHWHHMM  *  ■■■■■■■■■■« 

and  therefore,  ex  squali. 


■■■■■■■■■«       *       ■■■■■■■■■■■ 


(B.  5.  pr.  22), 

therefore  the  fides  about  the  equal  angles  are  proportional, 

and  thofe  which  are  oppolite  to  the  equal  angles 

are  homologous. 

Q.  E.  D. 


220  BOOK  VI.    PROP.  V.    THEOR. 


F  tivo  triangles  have  their  Jides  propor- 
tional (•■■•■•■■-    :    ■■«.■■■■» 

::     ^mmmmmmm,      \  )     and 


(' 


■■■■■■■■■■■»     *     «•■■■■«■« 


::  — — ^—  :  i^^»— .)  they  are  equiangular, 
and  the  equal  angles  are  fubtended  by  the  homolo- 
gous fides. 


From    the    extremities   of 


,    draw 


and 


,    making 


W=     iB  (B.  i.pr.  2.1;); 


=  (B.  I.  pr.  32) , 

and  fince  the  triangles  are  equiangular. 


(B.  6.  pr.  4); 


but 


(hyp.); 


and  confequently 


(B.  5.  pr.  9). 


In  the  like  manner  it  may  be  fhown  that 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  V.    THEOR.  221 

Therefore,    the   two  triangles   having   a   common   bafe 
— «^— ,  and  their  fides  equal,  have  alfo  equal  angles  op- 


A     =^a„d^    =    ^ 


polite  to  equal  fides,  i.  e. 

(B.  I.  pr.  8). 

But  ^F     =   j^^  (conft.) 
and   .*•  jj^^     =:  M/^  ^   for  the  fame 

reafon    ^^^    z=    flU?  ^"^ 

confequently  ^^    :=  (B.  i.  32); 

and  therefore  the  triangles  are  equiangular,  and  it  is  evi- 
dent that  the  homologous  fides  fubtend  the  equal  angles. 

CUE.  D. 


222 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  VI.    THEOR. 


4 


.A 

F    tivo    triangles    (  _^**^  _^*'^ 
and  .^^___^  )  have  one 

angle  (  wKk  )   o/'  ///<'  one,  equal  to  one 

,      angle  (  m     \)  of  the  other,  and  the  Jides 

^     about  the  equal  angles  proportional,  the 

HPI^   triangles  Jhall  be  equiangular,  and  have 

thofe  angles  equal  which  the  homologous 

Jides  fubt  end. 


From  the  extremities  of 


of 


Z:^ 


about 


^—  ,  one  of  the  fides 
■     \  ,   draw 


and 


maki 


in 


g 


▼  =A 


and    ^W  zz. 


^=4 


then    ^  =: 


(B.  I.  pr.  32),  and  two  triangles  being  equiangular. 


■  ■^■■■•■■■a 


(B.  6.  pr.  4) ; 


but  •••■>••••••• 


(hyp.); 


(B.  5.  pr.  11), 


and  confequently 


•«■■«■«•■•* 


(B.  5.  pr.  9); 


k 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  VI.     THEOR.  223 

.*.      -^  \     =  >,♦*       in  every  refpedl. 

(B.  I.  pr.  4). 

But    ^yf  =    j^  (conft.), 
and  /.    ZLj    ■=.     J^  ;  and 

fince  alio  ■     \    ::z:    JHl  , 

^\    =   -^    (B.  i.pr.  32); 

j/\ 
and  .*.   A*I,....dW  ^"d    -^  \    are  equiangular,  with 

their  equal  angles  oppolite  to  homologous  Tides. 

Q^E.  D. 


224. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  VII.    THEOR. 


A 


/\ 


F  two  triangles  ( 


A 


and 


A 


» 


* *  )  Aave  one  angle  in 

•    each  equal  (        '   equal  to  ^^  ),  the 
\  Jides  about  two  other  angles  proportional 

\  (-^  :  — -  :: :  ..-—), 


^l 


A 


and  each  of  the  remaining  angles  ( 

and  ^..^  )  either  lefs  or  not  lefs  than  a 
right  angle,  the  triangles  are  equiangular,  and  thofe  angles 
are  equal  about  which  the  Jides  are  proportional. 

Firft  let  it  be  alTumed  that  the  angles  ^^   and    <.^ 
are  each  lefs  than  a  right  angle :   then  if  it  be  fuppofed 

that  i^A    ^"'^    ^^  contained  by  the  proportional  fides, 

are  not  equal,  let    ^\  be  the  greater,  and  make 

Becaufe  ^  =  ^  (hyp.),  and  ^\  =  ^J  (conft.) 
/.   ^»,    =   ^^--B   ^B.  I.  pr.  32); 


\ 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  FIT.    THEOR.  225 


(B.  6.  pr.  4), 

but  — ^^—  :  ■     ::  — — ■■—  :  — .— ..   (hyp.) 


•  9 

(B.  5.  pr.  9), 


4 


and  ,*.    ^^    =    ^^  (B.  1.  pr.  5). 

But   ^^B   is  lefs  than  a  right  angle  (hyp.) 

,•,    ^^^   is  lefs  than  a  right  angle  ;    and  ,',    ^B    muft 
be  greater  than  a  right  angle  (B.  i.  pr.  13),  but  it  has  been 

proved  ^   '^^^.^   and   therefore  lefs  than  a  right  angle, 
which  is  abfurd.     ,*.    ^<^    and   ^-\  are  not  unequal ; 
.',  they  are  equal,  and  fince  ^B    rz    /  \    (hyp.) 


4=4 


(B.  I.  pr.  32),  and  therefore  the  tri- 
angles are  equiangular. 


-^    and    ^5 


But  if  '^^  and  ^*-^  be  aflumed  to  be  each  not  lefs 
than  a  right  angle,  it  may  be  proved  as  before,  that  the 
triangles  are  equiangular,  and  have  the  fides  about  the 
equal  angles  proportional.  (B.  6.  pr.  4). 

Q.  E.  D. 

OG 


226 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  Fin.   THEOR. 


N   a  right  angled 
triangle 


.j^S^  9     ^^ 


( 

triangle  and  to  each  other. 
Becaufe  ^^p»     ~ 
common  to 


i 
a  perpendicular   ( 

be  drawn  from  the  right  angle 

to  the  oppojitejide,  the  triangles 


)  on  each  Jide  of  it  are  fimilar  to  the  whole 


(B.  I.  ax.  1 1 ),  and 


and 


t\^< 


;B.  I.  pr.  32); 


and  ..^^^^l  are  equiangular ;  and 
conlequently  have  their  Tides  about  the  equal  angles  pro- 
portional (B.  6.  pr.  4),  and  are  therefore  limilar  (B.  6. 
def.  I). 


In  like  manner  it  may  be  proved  that  ^^    is  fimilar  to 


k 


;  but 


has  been  ihewn  to  be  limilar 


to 


and 


k 


are 


fimilar  to  the  whole  and  to  each  other. 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  IX.    PROB. 


22: 


ROM  a  given  Jiraig/it  line  {     "  '"  ) 
to  cut  off  any  required  part . 

From    either    extremity    of  the 
given    line    draw   — ^■—"••••■t.    making    any 

angle  with  ■ ;  and  produce 

■•••••>    till  the  whole  produced  line 
■mtiBH*  contains       ■  >  as  often  as 

-■■"■"■-  contains  the  required  part. 

Draw  ,  and  draw 


■  is  the  required  part  of 


For  fi 


nee 


*  ■«■■•••« 


(B.  6.  pr.  2),  and  by  compolition  (B.  5.  pr.  18) ; 

— ^— >    -■".-  mmmmmm 

but       mmm 


'•■--•■  contains 


as  often 


as 


contains  the  required  part  (conft.) ; 
■■■—  is  the  required  part. 


Q.  E.  D. 


228 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  X.    PROB. 


and 


draw 


O  divide  a  Jlraight 

line  ( ) 

fanilarly  to  a 
given  divided  line 

)• 


From  either  extremity  of 
the  given  line  — i^ 

draw     ■■■■««a>s»aaaKaj»«M 

making  any  angle  ;   take 


and 


>■•••««     equal  to 


refpedlively  (B.  i.  pr.  2)  ; 


and  draw   — — --—  and 

-—   II   to  it. 


or 


and 


Since 


( —  j  are  II, 


(B.6.  pr.  2), 


(B.  6.  pr.  2), 


and  ,*,  the  given  line 
fimilarlv  to 


(conft.), 


(conft.). 


is  divided 


Q.E.  D. 


BOOK  VL    PROP.  XL    PROB. 


229 


O  yf«i/  a  third  proportional 
to  two  given  Jlraight  lines 


At  either  extremity  of  the  given 
line    ^— i^— »   draw    .---—— 
making  an  angle  ;   take 
....... .^    =  ,  and 

draw  I      : 


make  .,.._...   =:  , 

and  draw  ||       — ^ • 

(B.  I.  pr.  31.) 
lu  -         is  the  third  proportional 
to    -■^— ^^   and  _ 


For  fince 


but 


(B.  6pr.  2); 


■(conft.) ; 


(B.  5.  pr.  7). 


Q^E.  D. 


230 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XII.    PROB. 


O  find  a  fourth  pro- 
portional to  three 
given  lines 


Draw 


and 

take 

and 

alfo 

draw 

and 


making  any  angle ; 


(B.  r.  pr.  31); 
is  the  fourth  proportional. 


bU.     (;■. 


On  account  of  the  parallels, 


(B.  6.  pr.  2); 

•}  =  {  = 


.}  (conft.); 


■  ■■•■■■■•«      • 


(B.  5.  pr.  7). 


Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XIII.    PROP. 


^31 


O  Jind  a  mean  propor- 
tional between  two  given 
Jlraight  lines 


{ 


«ia«MMl«a«ni«l 


} 


Draw  any  ftraight  line 
make   — 


and 


bifed 


and  from  the  point  of  bifedtion  as  a  centre,  and  half  the 


line  as  a  radius,  defcribe  a  femicircle 
draw    — ^— ^—   JL    — — — 


cs 


is  the  mean  proportional  required. 


Draw 


and 


Since     '^^^  is  a  right  angle  (B.  3.  pr.  31), 
and   ^^^^—   is  J_  from  it  upon  the  oppofite  fide, 
•*.     •^^"■^   is  a  mean  proportional  between 
—  and    '                 (B.  6.  pr.  8), 
and  .*.  between    — — —  and    — ••  (conft.). 


Q.  E.  D 


232  BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XIV.    THEOR. 


QJJ  A  L    parallelograms 


\ 


and 


•which  have  one  angle  in  each  equal, 
have  the  Jides  about  the  equal  angles 
reciprocally  proportional 


( 


■)• 


II. 


And  parallelograms  which  have  one  angle  in  each  equal, 
and  the  fides  about  them  reciprocally  proportional,  are  equal. 


Let 

and 


-  and 


;    and 


and 


^■^~",  be  fo  placed  that     '■■■ '    ■ 
-■—  may  be  continued  right  Unes.     It  is  evi- 
dent that  they  mayaflume  this  pofition.  (B.  i.  prs.  13,  14, 

1 5-) 


Complete 


% 


Since 


•V 


\  \  \ 


(B.  5.  pr.  7.) 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  Xir.     THEOR.  233 


(B.  6.  pr.  I.) 

The  fame  conftrudtion  remaining  : 
r 

A 


(B.  6.  pr.  I.) 

—  (hyp.) 


(B.  6.  pr.  I.) 


(B.  5.  pr.  II.) 


and   .*.     ^Hi^   =       ^^  (B.  5.  pr.  9). 

Q^E.  D. 


H  H 


234 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XV.    THEOR. 


I. 

QUAL  triangles,  which  have 
one     angle     in     each     equal 

(  ^^    ^    ^B  ),  have  the 

JiJt's  about   the  equal  angles  reciprocally 
proportional 


(■ 


--     )• 


II. 


j^i 


And  two  triangles  which  have  an  angle  of  the  one  equal  to 
an  angle  of  the  other,  and  the  Jides  about  the  equal  angles  reci- 
procally proportional,  are  equal. 


Let   the   triangles  be   {o   placed    that   the  equal   angles 

^^     and   ^A    may  be  vertically  oppolite,  that  is  to  lay, 

lb    that  ^mmmmi^m     and    — -^—    may    be    in    the    lame 
ftraight  line.    Whence  alfo  i  and  -aiM^MMM    mull 

be  in  the  fame  ftraight  line.    (B.  i.  pr.  14.) 

Draw    ■— — —  ,    then 


> 


(B.  6.  pr.  I.) 


(B.  5.  pr.  7.) 


(B.  6.  pr.  I.) 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XV.    THEOR. 


235 


> 


(B.  5.  pr.  II.) 

II. 

Let  the  fame  conftruction  remain,  and 


(B.  6.  pr.  I.) 


and 


A 


(B.  6.  pr.  I.) 

But  — — . :  ^—  :: ;         .  ■  ,  (hyp.) 

(B.5    pr.  11); 
(B.  5.  pr.  9.) 


•  •  • 


>  -^ 


Q.E.  D. 


236 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XVI.    THEOR. 


PART  I. 

Y  four  Jh'ciight  lines  be  proportional 


the  reSlangle  ( ■ 


: ■■). 

!■>..._.. )  contaified 
by  the  extremes,  is  equal  to  the  rectangle 
X   .........)  contained  by  the  means. 

PART  II. 

And  if  the  reSt- 
angle  contained  by 
the  extremes  be  equal 
to  the  reBangle  con- 
tained by  the  means, 
the  four Jlraight  lines 
are  proportional. 


PART  I. 
From  the  extremities  of  •— i»    and  " 

^M^BHB    and    —————    _L   to  them  and  ^ 


draw 


and   ——•.-—-    refpedlively :    complete  the   parallelograms 
^^^^H    and 


I 


And  fince, 


•        BB««»»«B» 

(hyp.) 

(conft.) 

• 

H    (B.  6.  pr.  14), 

BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XVI.    THEOR.  237 

that  is,  the  redtangle  contained  by  the  extremes,  equal  to 
the  redangle  contained  by  the  means. 

PART  II. 
Let  the  fame  conftrudlion  remain  ;   becaufe 


•  • 


(' 


and        11  ^. -....-..■.  , 

(B.  6.  pr.  .4). 

But  = , 

and    — — i^    ^    — — — .    ^conft.) 

(B.  5.  pr.  7). 

Q.  E.  D. 


238 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XVII.    THEOR. 


fince 
then 


PART  I 

F  three  Jlraight  lines  be  pro- 
portional (—1  :   ^^^mmt 

::  — —  :  )  the 

reSlangle  under  the  extremes 
is  equal  to  the  fquare  of  the  mean. 

PART  II. 

And  if  the  reSlangle  under  the  ex- 
tremes be  equal  to  the  fquare  of  the  mean, 
the  three  fir  aight  lines  are  proportional. 


PART  I. 


Aflume 


X 


and 


X 


(B.  6.  pr.  16). 


or 


But 

X 


■"9 

-  X 


_.«i»  ^  ;  therefore,  if  the  three  ftraight  hnes  are 
proportional,  the  redlangle  contained  by  the  extremes  is 
equal  to  the  fquare  of  the  mean. 


Aflume  • 

PART  II. 

«  , then 

X 

•       « 

•  • 

and 

m»  9 

^^           • 

(B. 

6.  pr.  16), 

•  • 

wmm 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XVIIL    THEOR.         239 


N  a  given  Jlraight  line  (  )  ^,. 

to    conftruSi    a    reBilinear  figure 


fimilar  to  a  given  one  ( 


and  /imiiarly  placed. 


^ 


Relblve  the  given  figure  into  triangles  by 
drawing  the  lines   -«—---   and     ••..••*•. 

At    the    extremities    of  — — — ^    make 

^    =    Jb^^  and  %    =    \J^ : 

again  at  the  extremities  of  ■ 

and    ^^    =    ^^\    :  in  like  manner  make 

?  =  ^  ^"^  V  =  V  • 


make  -^^  =: 


Then 


-v 


is  fimilar  to 


It  is  evident  from  the  conftrudlion  and  (B.  1.  pr.  32)  tliat 
the  figures  are  equiangular ;  and  fince  the  triangles 


W  ^"  w 


are  equiangular;  then  by  (B.  6.pr.4), 


and 


240         BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XVIII.     THEOR. 
Again,  becaule     ^^^     and     ^^B    are  equiangular. 


mm       **      tt»afBffia«ai      • 


/.  ex  asquali. 


(B.  6.  pr.  22.) 

In  like  manner  it  may  be  fhown  that  the  remaining  fides 
of  the  two  figures  are  proportional. 

.-.    by  (B.  6.  def.  i .) 
is  fimilar  to 


and  fimilarly  fituated ;  and  on  the  given  line 

Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XIX.     THEOR.  241 


I M  I L  A  R  trian- 


gles ( 


A 


and  ^^^^^k  )  are  to  one 
another  in  the  duplicate  ratio 
of  their  homologous  Jides. 


Let 


^^  and    A 


be  equal  angles,  and 


and 


homologous   fides  of  the  fimilar  triangles 


i^HHft  and    MKKKL 


and     ^^^^^^   ^nd  on   -.-.-.——  the  greater 
of  thefe  lines   take    --■— ■   a   third   proportional,    fo   that 


*    «■■■■■■■■■  \ 


draw 


(B.  6.  pr.  4)  ; 


but 


(B.  5.  pr.  16,  alt.), 


■■■>■■■ 


MiSa 


(conll:.), 
—  confe- 


1 1 


242  BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XIX.    THEOR. 


A\ 


quently    ^^^   rz     ^^  for  they  have  the  fides  about 


the  equal  angles  ^^  and    ^Ik  reciprocally  proportional 

(B.  6.  pr.  15); 

Aa-A\ 

(B.  5  pr.  7); 


^^^L  :   ^^  ::  .... 

(B.  6.  pr.  I), 


that  is  to  fay,  the  triangles  are  to  one  anotlier  in  tlie  dupli- 
cate ratio  of  their  homologous  fides 
— i—  and    i^— -i  (B.  5.  def.  11). 

Q^  E.  D. 


BOOK  FI.    PROP.  XX.     THEOR. 


243 


IMILAR  poly- 
gons may  be  di- 
vided into  the 
fame  number  of 
fimilar  triangles,  eachfimilar 
pair  of  ivhic/i  are  propor- 
tional to  the  polygons ;  and 
the  polygons  are  to  each  other 
in  the  duplicate  ratio  of  their 
homologous  fides . 


Draw 


and 


and 


and     "  5     refolving 

the  polygons  into  triangles. 
Then  becaufe  the  polygons 


are  limilar, 
and   — 


■■■•■■««««■ 


and 


♦=♦ 


are  fimilar,  and  ^^   ^  ^J 
(B.  6.  pr.6); 


but  ^F^    =    w   becaufe  they  are  angles  of  fimilar  poly 
gons ;   therefore  the  remainders    ^^  and    ^k 

hence      nmmmmmmmmm     *        ■■>..■«••        \\     -_..._-__      * 

on  account  of  the  fimilar  triangles, 


are  equal  ; 
*  ? 


244           BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XX.     THEOR. 
and  --. :    ::  I   


on  account  of  the  fimilar  polygons, 

■  ■■■■*■■■■»  •  _^.^_^_— — ___  ••  ■■■■■■■HMM*  •  _^ 

ex  asquali  (B.  5.  pr.  22),  and  as  thefe  proportional  fides 
contain  equal  angles,  the   triangles 


s  ^^^      and    ^^^ 


are  fimilar  (B.  6.  pr.  6). 
In  like  manner  it  may  be  fhown  that  the 

triangles      ^^F    and     ^^K     are  fimilar. 


^^   and     ^^m 


But         -^^»      is  to    ^^^m     in   the  duplicate  ratio  of 
..-■■.....  to  .—.—>—  (B.  6.  pr.  19),  and 


^^^     is  to   ^^ 


in  like  manner,  in  the  duplicate 
ratio  of  -.■•■•■■-.•  to  —-——.; 


>> 


(B.  5-P'-.  II); 
Again     ^^^^     is  to    ^^^      in   the  duplicate  ratio   of 


^^^         to    ^^ 


to  — ^— — ,   and      ^^^F      is  to      ^^r     in 


T 


BOOK  VL     PROP.  XX.    THEOR.  245 

the  duplicate  ratio  of  ^i^—   to   . 


and  as  one  of  the  antecedents  is  to  one  of  the  confequents, 
fo  is  the  fum  of  all  the  antecedents  to  the  fum  of  all  the 
confequents ;  that  is  to  fay,  the  fimilar  triangles  have  to  one 
another  the  fame  ratio  as  the  polygons  (B.  5.  pr.  12). 


But      ^^M     is  to      ^^^F    in  the  duplicate  ratio  of 

to 


Q  ED 


246 


BOOK  VL    PROP.  XXI.    THEOR. 


ECTILINEAR    Jigures 


( 


<?«</ 


which  are  fimi/ar  to  the  fame Jigure  ( 
are  fimilar  alfo  to  each  other. 


Since  HHiBll^    and  are  fimi- 

lar, they  are  equiangular,  and  have  the 
fides  about  the  equal  angles  proportional 
(B.    6.   def.    i);     and    fince    the    figures 


and      '^%.      are  alfo  fimilar,  they 
are  equiangular,  and  have  the  fides  about  the  equal  angles 


proportional ;  therefore  IHIBl^  and  l^Hhk.  are  alfo 
equiangular,  and  have  the  fides  about  the  equal  angles  pro- 
portional (B.  5.  pr.  1 1),  and  are  therefore  fimilar. 


Q,E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXII.    THEOR.         247 


PART  I. 

Y  four  Jlraight  lines  be  pro- 
portional (^^^  I  ^^— 

::  —  :  ),  the 

Jiinilar  reSiilinear  figures 
fimilarly  described  on  them  are  aljo  pro- 
portional. 

PART  II. 

And  if  four  fimilar  reSlilinear 
figures,  fimilarly  defcribed  on  four 
jlraight  lines,  be  proportional,  the 
firaight  lines  are  alfo  proportional. 


Take 
and   — 


to 


fince 


PART  I. 

a  third  proportional  to 


,  and   —■••••■••   a  third  proportional 
— >   and      — — — >    (B.6.pr.  ii); 

:: ; (hyp.), 

■ — ■  ::  -— —  :  -■•••••••••  (conft.) 

.*.   ex  asquali. 


but 


and 


(B.  6.  pr.  20), 


248  BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXII.    THEOR. 


and   ,*. 


(B.  5.  pr.  11). 


PART  II. 

Let  the  fame  conftrudlion  remain 


(B.  5.  pr.  II). 


(hyp-). 

(conft.) 


(^E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXIII.    THEOR.         249 


QUIANGULAR  parallel- 
ograms   (  and 

^m^ )  are  to  one  another 
in  a  ratio  compounded  of  the  ratios  of 
their  fdes. 


Let  two  of  the  fides 


and 


-«... .  about  the  equal  angles  be  placed 
fo  that  they  may  form  one  ftraight 
line. 

Since  ▼  4.     M  --    f\\  , 

and  1^^    =    ^W     (hyp.). 


and  .*. 


+ 

and 


form  one  flraight  line 


(B.  I.  pr.  14) ; 
complete   ^  , 


Since 


# 


•    ■■«■• 


and 


# 


(B.  6.  pr.  i), 


(B.6.  pr.  i). 


has  to 

-    to  .„. 


a  ratio  compounded  of  the  ratios  of 
,  and  of  ^^— —   to  — n^— »»  . 


K  K 


Q^E.  D. 


250  BOOK  FT.    PROP.  XXIV.    THEOR. 


-B 


N  any  parallelogram  (^7    /) 
the  parallelograms  (  r^i 

and  ^  I  )  'which  are  about 
the  diagonal  are  Jimilar  to  the  whole,  and 
to  each  other. 


B-J  ^^ 


As    ^     I    and    ^ I     have   a 
common   angle  they  are  equiangular ; 


but  becaufe 


and 


are  fimilar  (B.  6.  pr.  4), 


and  the  remaining  oppofite  fides  are  equal  to  thofe, 

,    It  1      and   fn     I     have  the  fides  about   the  equal 
angles  proportional,  and  are  therefore  fimilar. 

In   the   fame  manner  it  can  be  demonftrated  that   the 

parallelograms  ^7      /     and    ^  /    are  fimilar. 
Since,  therefore,  each  of  the  parallelograms 


B  ..^E 


^. 


is  fimilar  to   ^1     I    ,  they  are  fimilar 
to  each  other. 

Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXF.    PROB. 


251 


O    defcribe    a    reSlilinear  Jigure, 
ivhic/i  /Jiall  be  Jimilar  to  a  given 


reBilinear Jigure  ( 
equal  to  another  (^^  ). 


),  and 


Upon  defcribe 

i_  defcribe  | |   =   ^^, 


and  upon    «_ 

and  having   ^M  ^ 


(B.  I.  pr.  45),  and  then 


smm 


Between 


and 


■H»»  will  lie  in  the  fame  flraight  line 
(B.  I.  prs.  29,  14), 

and  nu»»H..  find  a  mean  proportional 
(B.  6.  pr.  13),  and  upon  _^««_«i 


defcribe  Jtt^  9  iimilar  to 
and  fimilarly  fituated 


Then 


For  fince 


and 


are  fimilar,  and 

(confl.), 


■  ■■■■■■■■■ 


(B.  6.  pr.  20) ; 


252  BOOK  FI.    PROP.  XXV.    PROP. 


but   1 

•  • 

but  .^d^k    =    ■ 

(B.6.piM); 


(B.5.pr.ii); 


and  .♦. 


(conft.), 
(B.  5.  pr.  14); 


I 


and 


(conft.) ;  confequently. 


which  is  limilar  to 


is  alfo  = 


Q.  E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXVI.    THEOR. 


253 


F    fitnilai'     and  Jimilarly 
pojited  parallelograms 


have  a  common  angle,  they  are  about 
the  fame  diagonal. 


For,  if  poffible,  let 


be   the  diagonal  of 
draw  ■ 


(B.  I.  pr.  31). 


Since 


P..  ^ 


are  about  the  fame 


and  have 


diagonal    ^^^^^^^^  ,  ana  nave  jmm    common, 
they  are  fimilar  (B.  6.  pr.  24) ; 


but  - 


(hyp.). 


and   .*. 


(B.  5.  pr.  9.), 


which  is  abfurd. 


3 


is  not  the  diagonal  of 
in  the  fame  manner  it  can  be  demonftrated  that  no  other 
line  is  except  : . 

Q.  E.  D. 


254 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXVII.    THEOR. 


F  al/  the  reBangles 

contained    by    the 

fegments  of  a  given 

Jlraight   line,    the 

greateji  is  the  fquare  which  is 

defer ibed  on  ha  f  the  line. 


be  the 


unequal  fegments, 
equal  fegments ; 


For  it  has  been  demonftrated  already  (B.  2.  pr.  5),  that 
the  fquare  of  half  the  line  is  equal  to  the  redlangle  con- 
tained by  any  unequal  fegments  together  with  the  fquare 
of  the  part  intermediate  between  the  middle  point  and  the 
point  of  unequal  fection.  The  fquare  defcribed  on  half  the 
line  exceeds  therefore  the  redtangle  contained  by  any  un- 
equal fegments  of  the  line. 

Q.E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXFIII.    PROP. 


^SS 


O    divide  a  given 
Jlraight  line 


fo  that  the  rec- 
tcuigle  cojitained  by  its  segments 
may  be  equal  to  a  given  area, 
not  exceeding  the  fquare  of 
half  the  line. 

Let  the  given  area  be  := 
Bifedl  — 


or 


make 
and  if 


But  if 
muft 


■  ■■■ 

»        ****      ymmmm*** 

■■■1 

•; 

.  2 

the 

problem 

is  folved. 

9 

■II          ^ 

-4;-    ••■»■■■■••■ 

9 

then 

■■■ 

(hyp.). 


Draw 

make    - 
with    ^-i 


■  ■■■■IMHM   I 


or 


as  radius  defcribe  a  circle  cutting  the 


given  line  ;  draw 


Then  •••—  ^  wiMMaBB.-a-  ^ 

(B.  2.  pr.  5.)   = 


.2 


But 


+ 


(B.  I.  pr.  47); 


256         BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXVIII.    PROB. 


.\ X  — ■   +  ^— 

=  '  + \ 

from  both,  take  — i"— ^—  ^^ 
and    ""■■    X  ■— — ^^—•■••«    S3  «MMB 


But      "■■    '  ■  '     =:    — — — ••     (conft.), 

and    /.  ■-■""    is  fo  divided 

that  •"•"•    X  ———————    ^:     —•••.-2^ 

Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXIX.    PROB. 


^S7 


O  produce  agivenjlraight 
line  ( ),  fo 

that  the  reBangle  con- 
tained by  the  fegments 
between  the  extremities  of  the  given 
line  and  the  point  to  which  it  is  pro- 
duced, may  be  equal  to  a  given  area, 
i.  e.  equal  to  the  fquare  on 


Make 


draw    -—"--■ 
draw 
with  the  radius 
meeting 

Then  —■■-—' 


•-,   and 


But 


and 


5  and 

',  defcribe  a  circle 

■   produced. 


'  (B.  2.  pr.  6.)   =   — 


-^  + 


(B.i.pr.47.) 


:=   the 


given  area. 


Q^E.  D. 


L  L 


258 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXX.    PROB. 


1 

O  cut  a  given  finite  Jlraight  line  (        ■  — ■•  ) 
in  extreme  and  mean  ratio. 


On 


defcribe  the  fquare 


I 


(B.  I.  pr.  46) ;  and  produce 

X " 


,  fo  that 
^ s 


(B.  6.  pr.  29); 


take 
and  draw    ^ 
meeting   ^ 


Then 


U 


■•aatB •■ 


X- 


;B.  I.  pr.  31; 


■  ■■■taaBB 


and  is  .*.  ^ 


n 


;  and  if  from  both  thefe  equals 


be  taken  the  common  part 


\      I ,  which  is  the  fquare  of  ■ 

will  be  =   ■  ,  which  is   =  '■■-  X 


■  ■««■■«■*«      * 


that  is 


and 


.■ is  divided  in  extreme  and  mean  ratio. 

(B.  6.  def.  3). 

CLE.  D. 


BOOK  FI.    PROP.  XXXI.    THEOR.         2 


59 


F     any    fimilar    reSlilinear 

figures  be  fimilar ly  defer ibed 

on  the  fides  of  a  right  an- 

gled  triangle  (    ^''•»^     ),  the  figure 

defer  ibed  on  the  fide  (■....i  )  fuh- 

tending  the  right  angle  is  equal  to  the 
futn  of  the  figures  on  the  other  fides. 


From  the  right  angle  draw 

to    •> m. 

then    ■■■■■•■■■MHB  :   ^_— i— 


perpendicular 


but 


(B.  6.  pr.  8). 


(B.  6.  pr,  20). 


(B.  6.  pr.  20). 


•      •ammmmmm%mmm 


Hence 


but 


+ 


+ 


and  /. 


Q.  E.  D. 


26o        BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXXII.    THEOR 


F  two  triangles   (  ^ ^  ^«^ 

/^\  ),   have  two  fides  pro- 
portional ( ..1.^.^^ :  I  I 
\\        ..    ..........  I  •.•••..•••.),  and  be fo placed 
\    i7^  an  angle  that  the  homologous  Jides  are  pa- 


rallel, the  remaining  Jides  ( 
one  right  line. 


and 


)  form 


Since 


=  (B.  I.  pr.  29); 

and  alfo  fince  -^— ^    ||  ••■••••■>■ 

=   ^^    (B.  I-  pr.  29); 
=   ^^^  ;  and  fince 


■  ■■■«■■■««■     • 


—    (hyp.). 


the  triangles  are  equiangular  (B.  6.  pr.  6) ; 


M  =  /S 


but 


A+      +A  = 


+ 


A 


+  JI  = 


■*■«■»■»« 


I      I      1   (B.  I.  pr.  32),  and  /.    -*••—■»     and 

lie  in  the  fame  ftraight  line  (B.  i.  pr.  14). 

Q,E.  D 


BOOKVL    PROP.  XXXIII.     THEOR.       261 


N  egua/  circles  ( 


O-O 


),  angles. 


whether  at  the  centre  or  circumference,  are 
in  the  fame  ratio  to  one  another  as  the  arcs 


on  which   they  Jland  ( 
fo  alfo  are  fedlors. 


i-J::- 


o 


)■> 


Take  in  the  circumference  off         1  any  number 

of  arcs  "■— ■  ,    ■—  ,  &c.  each  ^  ^m»  ^  and  alfo  in 

the  circumference  of    f         j  take   any   number    of 

arcs  •  ,    ,  Sec.  each  ^   •***«*•,  draw  the 

radii  to  the  extremities  of  the  equal  arcs. 

Then  fince  the  arcs  — ,  —.  ,  i...,  &c.  are  all  equal, 
the  angles  #  ,   #  ,   ^,  &c.  are  alfoequal  (B.  3.  pr.27); 

.*.    ^V    is   the   fame   multiple   of   0     which    the   arc 
is  of  ^1^  •  and  in  the  fame  nianner    ^Bi^ 


is  the  fame  multiple  o 
is  of  the  arc 


which  the  arc 


....  •>•• 


V* 


262       BOOK  VI.    PROP.  XXXIII.    THEOR. 
Then  it  is  evident  (B.  3.  pr.  27), 

if"  ^11^   (or  if  m  times  w  )  C>  =>  ^  Mfg^ 


I 


(or  n  times  ^  ) 
then    ^^fc_i,i«^^    (or  »;  times   '••••^)  C!>  ■ 
.....^••*    (or  n  times  ) ; 


....  ,  (B.  5.  def.  5),  or  the 
angles  at  the  centre  are  as  the  arcs  on  which  they  fland ; 
but  the  angles  at  the  circumference  being  halves  of  the 
angles  at  the  centre  (B.  3.  pr.  20)  are  in  the  fame  ratio 
(B.  5.  pr.  15),  and  therefore  are  as  the  arcs  on  which  they 
ftand. 

It  is  evident,  that  fedlors  in  equal  circles,  and  on  equal 
arcs  are  equal  (B.  i.  pr.  4;  B.  3.  prs.  24,  27,  and  def.  9). 
Hence,  if  the  fedors  be  fubftituted  for  the  angles  in  the 
above  demonftration,  the  fecond  part  of  the  propofition  will 
be  eftablifhed,  that  is,  in  equal  circles  the  fedlors  have  the 
fame  ratio  to  one  another  as  the  arcs  on  which  they  ftand. 

Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  A.     THEOR. 

Y  the  right  line  {'mmm^um,), 
bifeSling     an     external 

angle   ^H    of  the  tri- 

yf 


263 


angle 


z. 


meet   the  oppojite  ^ 


Jide  (-^^— •)  produced,  that  whole  produced  fide  (  "■■•), 

and  its  external  fegment  (——--—)  will  be  proportional  to  the 
fides  (-^— — ■..—  and  ),  which  contain  the  angle 

adjacent  to  the  external  bifeSled  angle. 

For  if  I     be  drawn   ||  -.---»•»■•  ^ 

then    ^^   =    \    /  ,  (B.  i.  pr.  29) ; 


and 


=  ^,(hyp-). 

=    ^P,  (B.  I.  pr.  29); 
r........   zz.     ■      I  III.    ,  (B.  I.  pr.  6), 


and 


(B.  5.  pr.  7)  ; 
But  alfo. 


■  •■■■■■■■■■■  , 


(B.  6.  pr.  2); 
and  therefore 

(B.  5.  pr.  I,). 


Q.  E.  D. 


264 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  B.    THEOR. 


X 


F  an  angle  of  a  triangle  be  bi- 
Je5ied  by  a  Jlraight  line,  which 
likewife  cuts  the  bafe ;  the  rec- 
tangle contained  by  the  Jides  of 
the  triangle  is  equal  to  the  rectangle  con- 
tained by  the  Jegments  of  the  bafe,  together 
with  the  fquare  of  the  Jlraight  line  which 
bifedls  the  angle. 


Let 


be     drawn,     making 
^   =     ^;  then  fhall 

X + 


^r     \       defcribe  I 


About        y    \      defcribe  J  (B.  4.  pr.  5), 

produce  1  ■■  to  meet  the  circle,  and  draw   ■■■»>— 

Since  ^    =     ^^  (hyp-)' 
and    ^^    =    ^    (B.  3.  pr.  21), 


•      *       •C*i»l»l 


ind 


\ 


are  equiangular  (B.  i.  pr.  32) ; 


(B.  6.  pr.  4) 


ROOK  FI.     PROP.  B.    THEOR.  265 

(B.  6.  pr.  16.) 

.-  X + ' 

(B.  2.  pr.  3); 


■*«■«■ 


but X  — —  = X 

(B-  3-  pr.  35)' 

X = X 


Q.E.  D. 


MM 


266 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  C.    THEOR. 


fhall 


Y  from  any  angle  of  a  triangle  a 
Jlraight  line  be  drawn  perpendi- 
cular to  the  bafe ;  the  rectangle 
contained  by  the  fdes  of  the  tri- 
angle is  equal  to  the  reSlangle  contained  by 
the  perpendicular  and  the  diameter  of  the 
circle  defcribed  about  the  triangle. 


From 
draw  ■«>ii»«afa«« 

..  X 


of    ^y 


..-• 


—  ;  then 
Xthe 


diameter  of  the  defcribed  circle. 


Defcribe 


O 


(B.  4.  pr.  5),  draw  its  diameter 


and 


.  and  draw   ^-im—  •  then  becaufe 
^   ■      >•   (conft.  and  B.  3.  pr.  31) ; 

,Xl   =   />  (B.  3.  pr.  21); 


.%*< 


is  equiangular  to   /  ^ 

•        MHHaHMMHM 

l/^ 

and  ,*.  .-— .— 

(B.  6.  pr.  16). 

(B.  6.  pr.  4); 


X 


Q^E.  D. 


BOOK  VI.    PROP.  D.     THEOR. 


267 


IHE  reStangle  contained  by  the 
'  diagonals  of  a  quadrilateral  figure 
I  infcribed  in  a  circle,  is  equal  to 
\  both  the  reBangles  contained  by 


its  oppoftte  Jides. 


/  /be    any  quadrilateral 
/ 

o 


fieure  infcribed   in 


and  draw 


and 


then 


X 


X 


Make 


^k    =    W   (B.i.pr.  23), 
^   =  ^  ;  and 


(B.  3.  pr.  21); 


=  0 


«■■■■■■!■■« 


(B.  6.  pr.  4); 


and  ,*. 


X 


X 


(B.  6.  pr.  16) ;  again, 
becaufe  ^^    ^    ^F  (conft.), 


X- 


■■■■■•■•• 


268  BOOK  FL    PROP.  D.    THEOR. 

and\/  =     \^  (B.  3.  pr.  21); 


•■«■■■«•■■•    *    ■■■■■*>■■■ 


THE  END. 


(B.  6.  pr.  4); 
and  ,'.  '•"••■-•••  ^  .^__^  ^  .•■■•■•■■■■•  ^  a^^^MB 

(B.  6.  pr.  16)  ; 
but,  from  above, 

X =   X ; 

—  = X + X 

(B.  2.  pr.   I . 

Q^E.  D. 


cHiswirK:    PRiNirn  by  c.  "  iirxTiNoinM. 


fuciJ 


■O.,' 


^  \'yj